tents of theOperator's Manual directly via thevehicle's multi‐ media system (menu item "Vehi‐ cle"). Startwiththe quickguide, discoveryour vehicle's highlights or broaden your knowledgewith useful tips. Hereyou can find comprehen‐ sive informationabout operating your vehicle and about services and warranties in printed form.
vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or per‐ sonal injury.
Ownerâs Manuals | Mercedes-Benz USA
Digital in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the con- tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi- media system (menu item "Vehi- cle"). Start with the quick guide, discover your vehicle's highlights or broaden your knowledge with useful tips.
Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen- sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and warranties in printed form.
Digital on the Internet You can find the Operator's Man- ual on the Mercedes-Benz home- page.
Digital as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores.
É2135843804iËÍ
2135843804 Order no. P213 0464 13 Part no. 213 584 38 04 Edition D-2017
Apple® iOS
AndroidTM
Mercedes-Benz
E-Class Wagon
E-Class Wagon
Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz
Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol- lowing symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Please observe the warning notices in
this manual.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi- ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi- ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage.
% Useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
X
Instruction
(Q page) Further information on a topic
Display
Information in the multifunction dis- play/multimedia display
+
Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system
*
Corresponding submenus, which are
to be selected in the multimedia sys-
tem
*
Indicates a cause
Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with- out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstrasse 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany
As at 19.04.16
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or per- sonal injury. Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: R Model R Order R National version R Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif- fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus- trations. The following are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company
21358423135884038404
2 Contents
At a glance .................................................... 4 Cockpit ........................................................... 4 Warning and indicator lamps .......................... 6 Overhead control panel .................................. 8 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 10 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 12 Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 14 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 14 General notes ............................................. 15 Protecting the environment .......................... 15 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 15 Operator's Manual ........................................ 16 Service and vehicle operation ....................... 17 Operating safety ........................................... 18 Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ...................................... 19 Diagnostics connection ................................ 20 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 21 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 21 Problems with your vehicle ........................... 21 Reporting safety defects ............................... 21 Limited Warranty .......................................... 22
QR code for rescue card ............................... 22 Vehicle data storage ..................................... 22 Copyright ...................................................... 24 Occupant safety ......................................... 26 Restraint system ........................................... 26 Seat belts ..................................................... 28 Airbags ......................................................... 32 PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 39 Children in the vehicle .................................. 41 Pets in the vehicle ........................................ 50 Opening and closing .................................. 51 SmartKey ...................................................... 51 Doors ............................................................ 56 Load compartment ....................................... 59 Roller sun blinds ........................................... 65 Side windows ............................................... 66 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 70 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 75 Seats and stowing ...................................... 77 Correct driver's seat position ....................... 77
Seats ............................................................ 78 Steering wheel .............................................. 89 Using the memory function .......................... 91 Stowage areas .............................................. 92 Cup holder .................................................. 106 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 107 Sockets ....................................................... 109 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna ... 111 Installing/removing floor mats .................... 113 Light and visibility .................................... 114 Exterior lighting ........................................... 114 Interior lighting ............................................ 118 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 119 Mirrors ........................................................ 123 Operating the sun visors ............................. 125 Infrared reflective windshield ...................... 126 Climate control ......................................... 127 Overview of climate control systems .......... 127 Operating the climate control system ......... 128
Contents 3
Driving and parking ................................. 133 Driving ........................................................ 133 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 140 Automatic transmission .............................. 141 Refueling .................................................... 145 Parking ....................................................... 147 Driving and driving safety systems ............. 154 Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 199 Instrument Display overview ....................... 199 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 200 Operating the on-board computer .............. 200 Displays in the multifunction display ........... 201 Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 202 Menus and submenus ................................ 202 Head-up Display ......................................... 208 Multimedia system .................................. 210 Overview and operation .............................. 210 System settings .......................................... 218 Garmin® MAP PILOT navigation module ..... 223
Telephone ................................................... 224 Online and Internet functions ..................... 234 Media ......................................................... 237 Radio .......................................................... 243 Sound ......................................................... 248 Maintenance and care ............................. 250 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 250 Engine compartment .................................. 251 Cleaning and care ....................................... 257 Breakdown assistance ............................ 264 Emergency .................................................. 264 Flat tire ....................................................... 264 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 270 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 275 Electrical fuses ........................................... 280 Wheels and tires ...................................... 284 Noise or unusual handling characteris- tics ............................................................. 284 Regular checking of wheels and tires ......... 284 Notes on snow chains ................................ 285
Tire pressure .............................................. 285 Loading the vehicle ..................................... 291 Tire labeling ................................................ 296 Definitions for tires and loading .................. 301 Changing a wheel ....................................... 304 Technical data ........................................... 314 Notes on technical data .............................. 314 Vehicle electronics ...................................... 314 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number ............................................ 316 Operating fluids .......................................... 318 Vehicle data ................................................ 324 Display messages and warning/indi- cator lamps .............................................. 326 Display messages ....................................... 326 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 368 Index ......................................................... 386
4 At a glance Cockpit
1 Steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 Combination switch 3 DIRECT SELECT lever 4 Display (multimedia system) 5 Start/Stop button 6 Control panel for multimedia system 7 Climate control systems 8 Glove box 9 Hazard warning lights A Stowage compartment B Controls for the multimedia system C To lower the rear head restraint D ECO start/stop function E Parking Pilot F To set the vehicle level
143 G DYNAMIC SELECT switch
115 H PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp
141 I Control panel for multimedia system
210 J To adjust the steering wheel
134 K Control panel for on-board computer
210 L Cruise control lever
128 M To unlock the hood
94 N Electric parking brake
116 O Light switch
94 P Control panel for:
210
Steering Pilot
84
Active Lane Keeping Assist
139
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
188
Head-up Display
176
At a glance Cockpit 5
140 , 37 200 90 200 164 251 151 114
173 197 180 209
6 At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Instrument Display
1 Speedometer 2 ÷ ESP® 3 #! Turn signal light 4 Ð Steering assistance malfunction 5 Multifunction display 6 ! ABS malfunction 7 ; Check Engine 8 Tachometer 9 % This indicator lamp has no function A Electric parking brake applied (red)
F USA only ! Canada only B Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only C # Electrical malfunction
At a glance Warning and indicator lamps 7
199 D · Distance warning E ? Coolant too hot/cold
115 F Coolant temperature gauge G J Brakes (yellow)
201 H ! Electric parking brake (yellow) I 6 Restraint system J ü Seat belt is not fastened
199 K T Parking lights L Fuel level indicator 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location indicator M K High beam N L Low beam O R Rear fog light P h Tire pressure monitoring system Q å ESP® OFF
199
27 114
115 114 115
8 At a glance Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors 2 Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace®) 3 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off 4 | Switches the automatic lighting control
on/off 5 SOS button (mbrace®) 6 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
At a glance Overhead control panel 9
125 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
233
on/off
118 9 MB Info call button (mbrace®)
A Eyeglasses box
118 B 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun- roof
232
Opens/closes the roller sun blinds
118 C Inside mirror
118
118
233 94 70
70 124
10 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment
1 Adjusts the seats electrically 2 Switches the seat heater on/off 3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off 4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat 5 &% Locks/unlocks the vehicle 6 Opens/closes the tailgate 7 Adjusts and folds the outside mirrors out/in
electrically 8 W Opens/closes the right side window 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window A Child safety lock for the rear side windows B W Opens/closes the rear left side window
At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 11
81 C W Opens/closes the left side window
84 D Opens the door
85 E Sets the memory function
81 F Sets the seat fore-and-aft adjustment
56 59 123
G Adjusts the seat cushion length H Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support I Seat adjustment using the multimedia system J Adjusts the head restraints
66 K Adjusts the seat cushion inclination
66 L Adjusts the seat height
49 M Adjusts the seat backrest inclination
66
66 56 91 80 80 82
82 80 80 80
12 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
What to do in the event of an accident 1 QR code for accessing the rescue card 2 Safety vests 3 Button for the SOS emergency call system and
breakdown assistance 4 Checking and topping up operating fluids 5 Tow-starting and towing away 6 Flat tire
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 13
7 Starting assistance
22 8 Hazard warning lights
264 9 Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire
231
pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing the rescue card
318 A Tow-starting and towing away 276 B Tire-change tool kit 264 C TIREFIT kit
272 116 145
276 307 266
14 Digital Operator's Manual
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Operator's Manual # Select a menu item.
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the function and operation of: R the vehicle R the multimedia system
For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man- ual is deactivated while driving. The Digital Operator's Manual contains the fol- lowing menu items: R Search: allows you to search precisely for
keywords. R Quick start: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your vehicle immediately. R Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle in certain situations. R Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the bookmarks you have stored yourself.
# To scroll forwards/backwards: turn the controller.
# To display in full screen: navigate to the left 1.
# To select a note or store a bookmark: nav- igate to the right 3.
# To select a link: navigate down 2.
# To exit a content page: select the % symbol 5.
# To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol 4.
# To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the ß, $, Õ or % button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital Opera- tor's Manual remains open in the background. % The Operator's Manual can also be found in
the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all com- mon app stores.
Protecting the environment
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of your vehicle is directly related to the way you operate your vehicle. You can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentallyresponsible manner. Please observe the fol- lowing recommendations on operating condi- tions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor-
rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection.
General notes 15
# Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf- fic. # Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- sumption.
Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials first instead of just disposing of them.
The relevant environmental regulations and guidelines serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by the non-use of recon- ditioned components. Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the limited warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo- nents and parts from Daimler AG.
16 General notes
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi- ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessories or from repairs or welding
Airbags, Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol- lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console
# Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding. # Have accessories retrofitted at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, for example, the brake system. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality control. Each part has been spe- cially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts-delivery centers pro- vide for quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 316) when ordering MercedesBenz GenuineParts.
Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man- ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus- trations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys- tems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center. The Operator's Manual and maintenance booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi-
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author- ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.
Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
General notes 17
section in the maintenance and warranty infor- mation booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces- sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera- ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi- cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus- tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
18 General notes
Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasona- ble number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During a period of 18 months from original deliv- ery of the vehicle or a kilometer/mileage read- ing of 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first, vehicle repair is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the fol- lowing occurs: (1) the serious defect or damage can result in
deadly or serious injury to the vehicle occu- pants while driving AND this defect has already been repaired at least twice AND MercedesBenz, LLC has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair. (2) the defect or damage, though less serious than (1) above, has already been repaired at
least four times AND MercedesBenz has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair. (3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than 30 calendar days because of repair work resulting from this or other serious defects or damage. Please send your written notice to: MercedesBenz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal- functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.
# Always have the prescribed service/ maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under- side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam- mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts
Modification to electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com- ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function properly and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec-
tronic component parts or their soft- ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle
Damage to the vehicle may occur in the fol- lowing cases: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road. R The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot- hole. R A heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis.
In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam- mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system, they may catch fire.
General notes 19
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or # If driving safety is impaired while con-
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi- cle components USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."
20 General notes
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi- ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): This Device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the responsible party is: Continental Automotive Systems US Inc. 2400 Executive Hills Drive Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980 United States of America
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- necting devices to the diagnostics con- nection
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehi- cle could be affected. # Only connect equipment to a diagnos-
tics connection in the vehicle which is approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con- nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter: R Work relevant to safety R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications, installations and conversions R Work on electronic component parts
Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R the vehicle technical data R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with the authorized Mercedes-Benz service cen- ter or, if necessary, contact us at one of the fol- lowing addresses. In the USA: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
General notes 21
3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed- eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
22 General notes
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- ington, DC 20590, USA. Further information on vehicle safety can be found at: http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from culpable violation of these operat- ing instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from culpa- ble violation of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New Vehicle or Used Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in this manual
on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.
QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con- tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at http:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Vehicle data storage
Data acquisition A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or perma- nently store technical information about: R The vehicle's operating state R Events R Malfunctions
In general, the technical information documents the state of a component part, a module, a sys- tem or the surroundings. These include, for example: R Operating conditions of system components.
For example, fluid levels. R The vehicle's status messages and those of
its individual components. For example, the number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceler- ation, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position.
General notes 23
R Malfunctions and defects in important sys- tem components. For example, lights, brakes.
R Vehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations. For example, air bag deployment, intervention of stability con- trol systems.
R Ambient conditions. For example, outside temperature.
This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: R Assist in detecting and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects. R Analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent. R Optimize vehicle functions.
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical informa- tion can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example: R Repair services R Service processes R Warranty cases
The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic devices. You can obtain more information there, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- mation is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are con- ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- tion with other information (if necessary, after consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: R Accident reports R Damage to the vehicle R Witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con- tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- cle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emer- gency.
COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's oper- ation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. Additional information can be found in the multi- media system section and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit- uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data which will assist in under- standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
24 General notes
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were
operating; R Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened; R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, R How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the
special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehi- cle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci- dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with- out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les- see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: the EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter- ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys- tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Copyright Free and open source software Information on free and open source software licenses for your vehicle's software can be found on the data storage medium in your vehicle document wallet and on the Internet together with updates at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc. R DTSTM is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R Dolby® and MLPTM are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.
R BabySmartTM, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg- istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
R iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
R Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
R HD RadioTM is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation.
R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
R ZAGATSurvey® and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
General notes 25
26 Occupant safety
Restraint system Protection by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following: R Seat belt system R Air bags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing system
In the event of an accident, the restraint system can: R Reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. R Reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu-
pants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension- ing Devices and/or air bags supplement the pro- tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide pro- tection, each vehicle occupant must: R Have their seat belt fastened correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos-
sible. R Always be secured in an additional restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles if they are under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall.
However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying.
Reduced restraint system protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from modifications to the restraint system
The restraint system can no longer function correctly after alterations have been made. The restraint system may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example # Never alter the parts of the restraint
system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their software.
R If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
R USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a system selftest is performed, during which the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint sys- tem are then functional.
Restraint system malfunction R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint sys- tem
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or might not be trig- gered at all in the event of an accident. This
Occupant safety 27
may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci- dent How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place right at the start of the collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot constitute a reason for an air bag deployment. Neither do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with- out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air bag may have been deployed even though the vehicle only suf- fered minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, for example, this may result in sufficiently high lev- els of vehicle deceleration.
28 Occupant safety
The components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:
Component
Detected deploy- ment situation
Emergency Tension- ing Devices
Frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
Driver's air bag, front Frontal impact passenger air bag
Knee air bag
Frontal impact
Side air bag Window air bag
Side impact Side impact, rollover, frontal impact
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Side impact
The front passenger air bag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is extinguished. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta- tus of the front passenger air bag is correct ( page 37).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. This applies especially if an Emergency Tensioning Device or an air bag was triggered. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- gered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear-
ing.
R In general, the powder released is not haz- ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro- tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can- not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu-
pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
R The seat belt must: - Not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across your body. - Be routed across the center of your shoulder and as low down across your hips as possible.
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
Occupant safety 29
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul- der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil- dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads ( page 92).
The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a child seat safety feature: R Front-passenger seat R Rear seats
The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the cargo compartment are not equipped with a child seat safety feature.
Activate or deactivate the child seat safety fea- ture of the seat belt ( page 43). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" ( page 41).
Reduced protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam- ple. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
30 Occupant safety
routed across the center of your shoul- der.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller build
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can- not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys- tem.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage
Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the func- tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices. The Emergency Tensioning Devices can, then, not function as intended and the seat belt can no longer provide the intended pro- tection. # Before starting the journey, make sure
that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R If the seat belts are damaged, modified,
extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
R If the Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages or seat belt retrac- tors have been modified
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices can accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho- rages or seat belt retractors. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi- ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
Occupant safety 31
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- not be pulled out any further.
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor- responding seat.
# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide the seat belt outlet into the desired position.
# Let go of the belt outlet release and ensure that the seat belt outlet locks in position.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deacti- vate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system.
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied, the Emergency Tensioning Device may deploy in the event of an accident.
32 Occupant safety
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Activating or deactivating seat belt adjust- ment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Vehicle Settings . Belt Adjustment # Activate or deactivate the function.
Seat belt warning for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru- ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu- pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after every engine start. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. During a journey, the seat belt warning lights up if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags Overview of air bags
1 Knee air bag 2 Driver's air bag 3 Front-passenger air bag 4 Window air bag 5 Side air bag The installation location of an air bag is identi- fied by the AIRBAG symbol.
When activated, an air bag can provide addi- tional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
AIRBAG
Potential protection for ...
Knee air bag
Thigh, knee and lower leg
Driver's air bag, front passenger air bag
Head and ribcage
Window air bag Head
Side air bag
Ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants
The front passenger air bag can be deployed in an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct ( page 37).
* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Protection potential of air bags Depending on the accident situation, an air bag is able to increase the protection offered by a correctly fastened seat belt.
Occupant safety 33
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the air bag cannot perform its intended pro- tective function and deployment may even cause further injuries. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all vehicle occupants: R Have their seat belt fastened correctly,
including pregnant women. R Are seated properly and that distance to
the air bags is as large as possible. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no
objects between the air bag and the vehicle occupant.
To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of the air bag: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible.
34 Occupant safety
When doing so, always observe the informa- tion on the correct driver's seat position ( page 77). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the air bag to be deployed without restriction. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. Other- wise you will be in the deployment area of the air bags. R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Otherwise, your feet will be in the deploy- ment area of the air bag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes ( page 41). R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may restrict cor- rect functioning of an air bag. Therefore always ensure that: R There are no other persons, animals or
objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R Do not fix any accessory parts, such as cup holders, inside the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on doors, side windows or side pan- eling. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
Reduced air bag protection
& WARNING Risk of injury from modifica- tions to the airbag cover
If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon- ger function correctly. # Never modify an airbag cover and do
not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an air bag can be identified by the designation AIRBAG ( page 32).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- vent the deployment of air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, operation of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff may be restricted.
# You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond- ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tions of the sensors in the door paneling
Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door panel- ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. # Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Occupant safety 35
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer has a protective function and cannot protect as intended in the event of an accident. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed air bags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger airbag Points to remember when the front passenger seat is occupied The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys- tem. The front passenger air bag is enabled or disabled accordingly. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi-
tioned correctly ( page 41).
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- ment.
R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front passenger seat.
R The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina- tion and the head restraint setting accord- ingly.
36 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func- tion of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. This could result in the front passenger air- bag not functioning as intended during an accident. # Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint system. # The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. # The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as pos- sible against the backrest of the front passenger seat. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
A person in the front passenger seat must: R Have their seat belt fastened correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos-
sible.
Otherwise, the front passenger air bag may be deactivated by mistake, for example, because the front passenger: R Transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest. R Sits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the sitting surface.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to deactivated front passenger airbag
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa- bled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.
# Ensure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp System self-test
When the ignition is switched on, a system selftest is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.
Occupant safety 37
The status of the front passenger airbag is then displayed: R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu- ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta- tus of the front passenger air bag is correct for the prevailing situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con- tinuously.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always make sure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
38 Occupant safety
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe- cific information ( page 35). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and you position the front passenger seat too close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci- dent, the child could: R Come into contact with the vehicle inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is lit, for example. R Be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul- der belt guide on the child restraint sys- tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary,
adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. # Always observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe- cific information ( page 35). If a person is sitting in the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con- tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. Always observe the following informa- tion. If the front passenger seat is occupied by: R An adult or a person with a build correspond-
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger air bag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult
Occupant safety 39
should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R A person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up and remains lit depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is off: move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible or a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: a person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It will not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger air bag is enabled or deactivated in accordance with the per- son in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
Further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat ( page 47).
PRE-SAFE® system Information on PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv- ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas- ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas- ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Closing the
sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: Adjusting
the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increas- ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi- media system is switched on, generates a
40 Occupant safety
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro- tective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi- tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing PRE-SAFE® measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your- self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.
Information on PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipa- tory occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat. If an accident does not occur, the pre-emp- tive measures that were taken are reversed . R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is can- celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS system limitations R No measures are implemented:
- If the vehicle is backing up. R The brakes are not applied:
- Whilst driving.
or - When entering or exiting a parking space
using Parking Pilot.
Information on PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front-seat vehicle occupant's upper body toward the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bol- ster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the dis- tance between the door and the vehicle occu- pant. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is malfunctioning, the display message PRESAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual is displayed ( page 327).
Children in the vehicle Notes on the safe transportation of children
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j. R Starting the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment. # Never leave children and animals unat-
tended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people particularly children are exposed to extreme heat or cold over an extended period of time, there is a risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone particularly chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect it with a blanket, for example.
Occupant safety 41
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: R All 50 states R The U.S. territories R The District of Columbia R All Canadian provinces All child restraint systems must meet the follow- ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2 You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
42 Occupant safety
To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following notes: R Only secure children using a child restraint
system which is suitable and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, as well as appro- priate to the height, age and weight of the child. Be sure to observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. R Always install a child restraint system on a rear seat if possible. R Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: - the seat belt system - the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting
bracket - the Top Tether anchorages R The manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. R The warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by incorrect installation of the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed on a suitable seating position, it cannot perform its intended protective func- tion. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. # Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cush- ions. # Always use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrectly installed child restraint sys- tems
If the child restraint system is not correctly installed or secured, it could release in the event of an accident, sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instructions.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to a load in
Occupant safety 43
an accident may then not be able to perform their intended protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. # Always replace child restraint systems
immediately that have been damaged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. The following notes must be observed: R When installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, the information on installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 47).
R Instructions and safety notes on the auto- matic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 35).
R Safety notes on the seat belt ( page 28). R Information on the correct use of the seat
belt ( page 32).
Activating/deactivating the child seat safety feature of the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The child seat safety feature is deactivated and the seat belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel. It is therefore not possible to engage the seat belt again. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Activate the child seat safety feature again and correctly secure the child restraint system.
When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.
Installing a child restraint system: # Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions when installing and removing the child restraint system. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.
Activating the child seat safety feature: # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again. When the child seat safety feature is activa- ted,you should hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.
44 Occupant safety
Deactivating the child seat safety feature: # Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide it back
to the seat belt outlet.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat attachment Notes on LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing systems
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and exceeding the per- missible weight limit
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protection for children weighing more than 49 lb (22 kg), who are secured using the seat belt integrated in the child restraint system. For example, the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. # If the child weighs more than 49 lb
(22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint systems with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
When installing a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed restraint systems. LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R-44. Only child restraint systems that have been approved in accordance with ECE R-44 may be attached to LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets.
Symbol for installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
Installing LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat attachments
& WARNING Risk of injury when using the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys- tem and exceeding the permissible weight
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protection for children weighing more than 49 lb (22 kg) who are secured using the seat belt integrated in the child restraint system. For example, the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # If the child weighs more than 49 lb
(22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is secured using the seat belt of the vehicle seat. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
When installing a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged cor- rectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets.
Occupant safety 45
1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat
When installing a child restraint system, the seat belt for the center seat could be dam- aged.
46 Occupant safety
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap- ped.
# Remove each cover for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets 1.
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets 1.
# After removing the child seat, replace each cover for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets 1.
Securing Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after installing Top Tether belts
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci- dent or during braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function.
Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. # Always lock rear seat backrests after
installing Top Tether belts. # Observe the lock verification indicator.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether as Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle. The child restraint system must be equipped with a Top Tether belt.
Occupant safety 47
# If necessary, move head restraint 1 upwards Adjusting the rear seat head restraints( page 84).
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
# Route Top Tether belt 5 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars.
# Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards between combined cargo cover and net 3 and backrest 2.
# Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt 5 without twisting into Top Tether anchor- age 4.
# Tension Top Tether belt 5. Always comply with the child restraint system manufactur- er's installation instructions when doing so.
# If necessary, move head restraint 1 down- wards Adjusting the rear seat head restraints( page 84). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 5.
Child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the information on the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff ( page 35). By doing this, you can avoid risks caused by: R A child restraint system that is not detected
by the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff. R The unintentionally deactivated front passenger air bag. R Incorrect positioning of the child restraint system.
Forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat When using a rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag must always be deactivated. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously ( page 37). When using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, it is essential to observe the fol- lowing: R Move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible. R Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical
position. R Retract the seat cushion length as far as pos-
sible. R The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front
48 Occupant safety
passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. R If necessary, adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. R Move the seat cushion inclination to the highest, most vertical position. R Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. R If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. R Never place objects, for example, a cushion, under or behind the child restraint system.
Always comply with the manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
Child safety locks
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j. R Starting the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment. # Never leave children and animals unat-
tended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people particularly children are exposed to extreme heat or cold over an extended period of time, there is a risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone particularly chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING There is a risk of accident and injury if you leave children unatten- ded in the vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
# Always activate the child safety locks available if children are traveling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Child safety locks are available for the rear doors and for the rear side windows. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.
Occupant safety 49 Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows
# To activate/deactivate: press button 2. Opening/closing the rear side windows is possible: R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch on the driver's door.
50 Occupant safety
R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driv- er's door.
% Vehicles with folding bench seat :The switch for opening the tailgate which is loca- ted on the right-hand wheel arch when viewed in the direction of travel is also secured.
Pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat- tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten- ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. Thereby an animal may: R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuver and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-
tended. # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, for example using a suitable animal carrier.
SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions
& WARNING Danger of accident or injury if children are left unattended in the vehi- cle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment.
Moreover, children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P j or shifting manual transmission into idle position. R starting the engine.
# Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields
# Keep the key away from strong mag- netic fields.
Opening and closing 51
1 Locks 2 Battery check lamp 3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate 5 Panic alarm The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R The doors R The tailgate R The fuel filler flap
52 Opening and closing
If you do not open the vehicle within approx- imately 40 seconds after unlocking: R The vehicle is locked again. R Anti-theft protection is reactivated. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec- tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality. % If battery check lamp 2 does not light up
after pressing the % or & button, the battery is discharged.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Vehicle Settings . Acoustic Lock Feedback # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Priming/deactivating the panic alarm Prerequisites R Ignition switched off.
# To prime: press button 1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
# To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit
(the SmartKey is inside the vehicle).
Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the key: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
# To switch between settings: press the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice.
If the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R Pressing the % button a second time cen-
trally unlocks the vehicle. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Reducing the energy consumption of the SmartKey If you do not intend to use the vehicle for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the following functions on the SmartKey. R KEYLESS-GO starting function R KEYLESS-GO
# To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the Smart- Key.
% When the vehicle is started with the Smart- Key in the stowage compartment of the cen- ter console ( page 135), the SmartKey functions are automatically activated.
Inserting/removing the mechanical key
# To remove: press release knob 1. Mechanical key 2 is pushed out slightly.
# Pull out mechanical key 2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
% You can use the intermediate position of mechanical key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.
# Press release knob 1 again and fully remove mechanical key 2.
# To insert: press release knob 1. # Insert mechanical key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Opening and closing 53 # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
54 Opening and closing
Requirements You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop. # Remove the mechanical key ( page 53).
# Press release button 2 down fully and remove cover 1.
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compart- ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat- tery.
# Push in battery compartment 3. # Replace cover 1 so that it engages.
Problems with the SmartKey Problem You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Possible causes are: R The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
Problem You have lost a SmartKey.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The SmartKey is faulty.
# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary . # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle . # Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical locking mechanism changed as well.
Opening and closing 55
56 Opening and closing
Doors Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. The locking pin pops up when the rear door is unlocked.
# To open a rear door: pull the rear door han- dle again.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle centrally from the inside
# To unlock: press button 1. # To lock: press button 2.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY-
LESS-GO.
# To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle with KEY- LESS-GO
Requirements R The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle must not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used must both be closed.
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- face of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen- sor surface 2 for an extended period.
% For further information on convenience clos- ing ( page 68).
If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto- matically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO Problem You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Possible causes are: R KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated . R The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
Opening and closing 57
58 Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The SmartKey is malfunctioning.
# Activate KEYLESS-GO . # Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary . # Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the vehicle . # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Switching the automatic locking feature on/off The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- ing faster than walking pace.
# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
Danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R If the vehicle is being tow started/pushed. R On a roller dynamometer.
Unlocking/locking the driver's door using the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv- er's door using the emergency key.
# Insert the emergency key into opening 1 in the cover.
# Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. # Release the door handle.
Opening and closing 59
# To unlock: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin- der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Load compartment Opening the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail- gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
60 Opening and closing
* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
To open the tailgate, the following options are available: # Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey. # If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate
handle and release it again immediately. # With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate
position, pull the tailgate upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.
# Pull remote opening switch 1 for the tail- gate.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Move your foot below the bumper ( page 63).
# Vehicles with folding bench seat: Pull but- ton 1 for the tailgate twice. The tailgate is unlocked.
If the tailgate has been locked from the outside, or the child safety lock has been activated, the tailgate cannot be unlocked with button 1. The tailgate is equipped with an automatic obstacle detection function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automati-
cally opening, this process is stopped. The auto- matic obstacle detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening the tailgate.
Closing the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always store objects in such a way that
they cannot be flung around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More- over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the p button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by moving your foot in a kicking motion under the rear bumper.
Opening and closing 61 To close the tailgate, the following options are available: # Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release
it as soon as it begins to close. # Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey (with the SmartKey in the vicinity of the vehicle).
# Press closing button 1 on the tailgate.
62 Opening and closing
# Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press locking button 2 in the tailgate. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate closes and the vehicle is locked.
# Press remote operating switch 1 for the tailgate.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Move your foot below the bumper ( page 63).
Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle detection with reversing function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto- matically closing, the tailgate automatically opens again slightly. The automatic obstacle detection with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when closing the tailgate. # When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function
The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin-
gers. R Over the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
path.
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap- ped.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped: R Press the p button on the SmartKey,
or R Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door, or R Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate, or R Pull the tailgate handle.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.
Observe the notes when opening ( page 59) and closing ( page 61) the tailgate. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate
is opening or closing.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten- tional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that the key located is at least 10 ft
Opening and closing 63
(3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit- uations.
When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground you could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Requirements: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move- ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back.
64 Opening and closing
1 Sensor detection range
If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function if: R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due
to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros-
thetic leg.
The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R If persons' arms or legs move in the sensor
detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehi- cle, sitting on the edge of the cargo compart- ment, or picking up objects. R If objects are guided behind or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. charging cables, tensioning straps or luggage. R When working on the trailer coupling, trailers or rear bicycle racks. Deactivate KEYLESS-GO ( page 52) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range, to approx- imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at
the desired position.
# Press and hold the closing button in the tail- gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate then stops in the stored position when opened.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. Deactivating the opening angle limiter # Press and hold the closing button on the tail-
gate until two acoustic signals sound.
Unlocking the tailgate with the mechanical key # Fold the rear seat backrest forward. # Remove the combined cargo cover and net
( page 99).
# Insert mechanical key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate is unlocked.
Emergency release of the tailgate from the inside (vehicles with a folding bench seat)
Opening and closing 65
Roller sun blinds Extending the rear side window roller sun- blinds
* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. # Always move the roller sun blind by
hand. # Do not drive with the roller sun blind
hooked in and side windows opened at the same time.
# Press the cover down in the direction of arrow 1 and pull in the direction of arrow 2 and remove it.
# Pull the emergency release lever in the direc- tion of arrow 3. The tailgate is unlocked.
66 Opening and closing # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and
hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window.
Side windows Opening/closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the but- ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper- ate the side windows, particularly when unat- tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the
rear side windows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
1 Closing 2 To open
The buttons in the driver's door take prece- dence. # To start automatic operation: press/pull
the W button beyond the pressure point. # To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.
Automatic reversing function for the side windows If an object blocks a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers. R over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing
path. R during resetting. R when closing the side window again man-
ually immediately after automatic revers- ing.
Opening and closing 67
This means that the reversing function can- not prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window again.
Ventilating the vehicle before starting a jour- ney (convenience opening)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
68 Opening and closing
# Press and hold the % button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The sliding sunroof is opened. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. # To continue the opening procedure: press
the % button again.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button.
Closing side windows from the outside (con- venience closing)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by inadvertent convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win- dow and the sliding sunroof. # Observe the complete closing proce-
dure when using convenience closing.
Problems with the side windows Problem A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Check to see if any objects are in the window guide.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Press and hold the & button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The sliding sunroof is closed. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
# To close the roller sunblinds: press the & button again.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button.
% Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO ( page 56).
Problem
Opening and closing 69
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win-
dow.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has
closed, and hold the button for an additional second. The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
70 Opening and closing
Sliding sunroof Opening/closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while opening and closing the sliding sunroof
During opening and closing, parts of the body could get caught in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. # When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop- ped.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil- dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while opening and closing the roller sun blind
When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts become trapped between the roller sun blind and frame or the sliding sun- roof. # When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun blind.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop- ped.
* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and ice
Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of the sliding sunroof. # Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun- roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower
Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. R The panoramic sliding sunroof can only be
opened when the roller sunblind is open.
Opening and closing 71
R The roller sunblind can only be operated when the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
# To start automatic operation: press/pull the 3 button beyond the pressure point.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the 3 button again.
Restrictions: R Vehicles without a panoramic sliding sun-
roof: The automatic opening and raising fea- ture is available only when the sliding sun- roof is closed. R Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sun- roof: The automatic raising feature is only available when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised. R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof rack is installed. The panor- amic sliding sunroof closes again automati- cally when it encounters resistance.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun- roof during the closing process, the sliding sun- roof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub- stitute for your attentiveness. # When closing, make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
The reversing function does not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers R during the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the clos-
ing path R during resetting R when closing the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic reversing
72 Opening and closing
This means that the reversing function can- not prevent someone being trapped in these situations. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during
the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If there is an object obstructing the roller sun- blind during the closing process, the roller sun- blind opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub- stitute for your attentiveness. # When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
make sure that no body parts are in the sweep.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, for exam- ple small fingers. This means that the reversing function can- not prevent entrapment in these situations. # When opening or closing the roller sun
blind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped.
Automatic features of the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
By pushing or pulling the 3 button you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving " and "Automatic lowering feature". Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is automatically lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering feature Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, the slid- ing sunroof is automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds it is raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto- matic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons.
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion.
# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi- ately pull back the sliding sunroof but- ton. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
Problems with the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
Opening and closing 73
Problem The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by closing the sliding sunroof again If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
74 Opening and closing
Problem
Vehicles without a panoramic slid- ing sunroof: the sliding sunroof does not operate smoothly. Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind does not operate smoothly.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist-
ance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force.
# Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear. # Press the 3 button for another second. # Use automatic operation to fully raise and then close the sliding sunroof.
# Pull the 3 button down repeatedly to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull the 3 button for another second. # Pull and hold the 3 button down until the roller sunblind is completely closed. # Pull the 3 button for another second. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-theft protection Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event that the engine cannot be star-
ted (yet the starter battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system (anti-theft alarm system) If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R A door is opened. R The tailgate is opened. R The hood is opened.
The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately 10 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey. R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Opening and closing 75
When the ATA system is armed, indicator lamp 1 flashes. The ATA system is automatically deactivated: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart-
Key. R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey inside the vehicle.
76 Opening and closing
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO.
% When the mbrace service ( page 232) is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Center.
Deactivating the ATA (anti-theft alarm sys- tem) alarm # Press the %, & or p button on the
SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button (the SmartKey is
inside the vehicle). Stopping the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle (with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle).
Correct driver's seat position
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
Seats and stowing 77
Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R you are as far away from the driver's airbag
as possible R you are sitting in a normal upright position R your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
R your legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly
R the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint
R you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
R you can move your legs freely R you can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly R you should have a good overview of traffic
conditions R the seat belt is pulled snugly against the
body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area
78 Seats and stowing
Seats Adjusting the front seat manually and elec- trically (without Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can- not provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an incor- rect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for exam- ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Adjust the seat correctly before starting
the journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoul- der.
Seats and stowing 79
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make
sure that there are no objects in the footwell or under or behind the seats.
80 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front seat manually and elec- trically (with Seat Comfort Package)
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 4 and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever
5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft position
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position 5 Seat cushion length
Adjusting the seats electrically 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion length 5 Seat cushion inclination 6 Seat fore-and-aft position
# Save the settings with the memory function ( page 91).
Adjusting the front passenger seat from the driver's seat Requirement: R Power supply switched on This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable front passenger seat.
Seats and stowing 81
You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: R Seat adjustment R Seat heater R Seat ventilation R Memory function
82 Seats and stowing
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the indica- tor lamp in the button lights up. The front passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons in the door control panel on the driv- er's side.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1 To raise 2 To soften 3 To lower 4 To harden # Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints man- ually
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
Seats and stowing 83
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can- not provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the gap between the head restraint and the back of your head: # To move forward: pull the head restraint
forward.
# To move back: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint back.
Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints
# To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side bolster 2.
84 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the gap between the head restraint and the back of your head: # To move forward: pull the head restraint
forward. # To move back: press release knob 1 and
push the head restraint back. Lowering the rear seat head restraints from the front
# Press button 1. Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards.
# To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop.
# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.
# To install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until it engages.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
Switching the seat heating on/off
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down. Only the outer head restraints can be removed.
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat- edly switching on the seat heater
Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.
The health of persons with limited tempera- ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affec- ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heater.
# To switch on/increase the level: press but- ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps light up.
# To switch off/reduce the level: press but- ton 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
% The seat heater automatically switches down from the three heating levels after certain periods of time: 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heater is switched off.
Seats and stowing 85
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirement: R Power supply switched on
# To switch on/increase the level/ decrease the level: press button 1 repeat- edly until the desired ventilation level is set. Depending on the ventilation level, up to three indicator lamps light up.
# To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
86 Seats and stowing
Folding bench seat in the cargo compart- ment Notes on the folding bench seat
& WARNING Risk of injury when the seat backrest is not upright and locked in position
If the seat backrests of the rear bench seat are not locked in the upright position, the seat backrest of the folding bench seat may fold down while driving. In this case, the seat belts may not perform their intended protective function. # Make sure that the seat backrests of
the rear bench seat are locked in the upright position.
Observe the notes on "Seat belts" ( page 32), "Head restraints" ( page 82) and "Children in the vehicle" ( page 41). The folding bench seat is only approved for use with child seats designed for children up to six years old .
A switch to open the tailgate from the folding bench seat is located on the wheel arch, on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. You can obtain information on child restraint systems on the folding bench seat from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The folding bench seat may only be used when the combined cargo cover and net is installed.
Folding out the folding bench seat
Requirements: R The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are
locked in the upright position. R The handle of the combined luggage cover
and net has been moved up and, to improve the rear view, the upper part of the plate has been folded down.
# Push down the seat cushion until the seat backrest engages fully.
# Fold the head restraints upwards. Installing and removing the seat cushion You must remove the seat cushion on the folding bench seat beforehand if you wish to lift the cargo compartment floor in the event of a flat tire, for example.
# Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat backrest of the folding bench seat upwards.
# Hook the seat belts into retainers 3. # Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of
the seat backrest. # Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of
the folding bench seat into the seat position.
Seats and stowing 87
88 Seats and stowing
Folding back the folding bench seat
* NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat when folding back
The folding bench seat may be damaged when it is folded back. # Fully insert the head restraints into the
guides. # Make sure that the seat belt buckles
engages in their guides.
# To remove: fold seat cushion 2 vertically upwards and remove it from seat cushion guide 1.
# To install: push seat cushion 2 into seat cushion guide 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3.
# Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting position 4 until it engages.
# Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and fold it back into its starting position until it engages.
# Press release knob 3 and fold the head restraints down.
# Press release knob 4 and push the head restraints all the way in.
# Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding bench seat into its starting position.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil- dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 89
# To unlock the steering column: push release lever 1 down completely.
# Adjust height 2 and distance to steering wheel 3.
# To lock the steering column: push release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
# Check and make sure that the steering col- umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
90 Seats and stowing
Adjusts the steering wheel electrically The steering wheel can be adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
1 Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel 2 Adjusts the height # Save the settings with the memory function.
1 To switch on 2 To switch off 3 Indicator lamp
Easy entry and exit feature How the easy entry and exit feature operates
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving off while adjusting the easy exit feature
If you drive off while the easy entry and exit feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc-
ess is complete before driving off.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # While the easy entry and exit feature
is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
# Move the adjustment lever of the steer- ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
The easy entry and exit feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards in the follow- ing situations: R you switch the ignition off. R you open the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on.
The steering wheel moves back to the last drive position in the following cases: R you switch the ignition on when the driver's
door is closed. R you close the driver's door when the ignition
is switched on.
The last drive position of the steering wheel is stored: R when you switch off the ignition. R with the last setting stored using the memory
function. If you press one of the memory function position buttons, the adjustment process is stopped. The crash-responsive exit aid only functions when the easy entry and exit feature is active. Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Vehicle Settings . Easy Entry/Exit # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Using the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv- er's side while driving, you could lose control
Seats and stowing 91
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station- ary.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set- ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. # During the setting procedure of the
memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the sweep of the seat or the steering wheel. # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi- ately release the memory function posi- tion button. The adjustment process is stopped.
92 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes connect me web app.
The memory function can be used when the igni- tion is switched off. Seat comfort positions for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. The following systems can be set using the memory function: R Seat, backrest and head restraint R Steering wheel
R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display
# To save: set the seat, the steering wheel, the Head-up Display and the outside mirrors to the desired position.
# Press the memory button M together with one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3. An acknowledgment tone sounds. The set- tings are stored.
# To call up: press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 until all the seat comfort systems are in the stored position.
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail- gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can-
not be thrown around in such situa- tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes and tailpipe trim
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.
Seats and stowing 93
# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down before you touch them.
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci- fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R when transporting objects in the cargo com- partment, the combined cargo cover and net must always be installed (cargo compart- ment cover and safety net). R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly.
94 Seats and stowing
Interior stowage compartments Overview of the front stowage compart- ments Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 92).
3 Stowage compartment in the front center console with a USB port (depending on the vehicle's equipment)
4 Glove box Locking/unlocking the glove box Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 92).
# Turn the mechanical key a quarter turn clock- wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to unlock).
Opening the eyeglasses box Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 92).
1 Stowage compartment in the doors 2 Stowage/telephone compartment in the
armrest with multimedia connections and stowage compartment, for example, for an MP3 player
# To open: press button 1. Opening the stowage compartment in the rear armrest Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 92).
# To open: press release catch 1 and swing the cover of the armrest upwards.
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat Folding the rear seat backrests forward
& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for- wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com- partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip.
Seats and stowing 95
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. The center and outer seat backrests can be fol- ded forward separately. The right outer seat backrest can only be folded forward together with the center seat backrest. The outer seat backrests are electrically unlocked with the release handles in either the cargo compartment or beside the seat backr- ests. # Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
restraints.
96 Seats and stowing
# Left and right and seat backrests: press right or left button 1. The corresponding seat backrest folds forward.
# Center seat backrest: pull seat backrest 2 release 3 forward.
# Fold seat backrest 2 forward.
Seats and stowing 97
Folding the rear seat backrest back
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when folding back the seat back- rest. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat back- rest.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. # Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
# Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not correctly engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not correctly engaged, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible.
Locking the center rear seat backrest Lock the center seat backrest if you want to secure the cargo compartment from unauthor- ized access. The center seat backrest can then only be folded forward together with the left seat backrest. Both seat backrests must be engaged and joined together.
98 Seats and stowing
# Fold the center and left seat backrest forward.
# To lock: slide catch 1 up. The release mechanism of the center seat backrest is locked.
# To unlock: slide catch 1 down. Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr- ests (cargo position) To enlarge the cargo compartment, you can adjust the seat backrests so that they are 10 degrees steeper (cargo position).
# Fold the seat backrest forward ( page 95). # Move bar 1 in the direction of the arrow. # Push seat backrest 2 back to bar 1 until
the backrest engages.
Load compartment cover with safety net (combined cargo cover and net) Notes on the cargo compartment cover
& WARNING Risk of injury due to poorly secured objects
On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.
Seats and stowing 99
* NOTE Damage to the cargo compart- ment cover when loading the vehicle
The cargo compartment cover may be dam- aged when loading the vehicle. # Do not place any objects above the
lower edge of the side windows or on the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover and the safety net form the combined luggage cover and net. When the cargo compartment cover is clipped in, no objects in the cargo compartment should obstruct the downwards movement of the cover when the tailgate is closed. The cargo compart- ment cover will otherwise be raised again auto- matically.
Extending/retracting the cargo compart- ment cover
# To extend: pull cargo compartment cover 1 back by grab handle 2 and clip it into the brackets on the left and right.
The cargo compartment cover raises automati- cally when the tailgate is opened and lowers again when the tailgate is closed. # To retract: unhook cargo compartment
cover 1 from the brackets on the left and right and guide it forwards by grab handle 2 until it is fully retracted.
The contour plate of the retracted cargo com- partment cover can be used in three positions: R folded up by 45° (loading position) R horizontal position (driving position) R folded down and locked in place (rattle-free
position when driving)
Installing/removing the combined luggage cover and net
Requirements R Remove from the cargo compartment or
from the left-hand rear door if the seat backr- ests are folded forwards. R The cargo compartment cover and safety net are retracted.
100 Seats and stowing
# To remove: press button 2. # Fold the combined luggage cover and net
backwards with the seat backrest folded up. # First, detach the combined luggage cover
and net from left-hand catch 1 and then remove it from right-hand bracket 4.
# To install: slide the combined luggage cover and net into right-hand bracket 4 up to the stop.
# Place the combined luggage cover and net into the left-hand bracket and slide it into catch 1 until the combined luggage cover and net engages audibly. Red lock verification indicator 3 must no longer be visible.
Attaching the combined luggage cover and net to the rear seat backrest
* NOTE Damage to the combined luggage cover and net when attaching it to the seat backrest
When the combined luggage cover and net is attached to the seat backrest, it may be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Do not fold the seat backrests back.
Requirement: R The seat backrests are folded forwards.
# Insert combined luggage cover and net 2 into both guides 1 and push it up to the stop in the direction of the arrow.
To disassemble the combined luggage cover and net, follow the instructions in reverse order.
Attaching the safety net
& WARNING Risk of injury due to poorly secured objects
On its own, the safety net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the safety net.
For safety reasons, always use a safety net when transporting a load. Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfill their protective functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
# Safety net without cargo compartment enlargement: pull the safety net back from the rear bench seat by tab 1.
# Hook the safety net first on the left, then on the right into eyelets 2.
Seats and stowing 101 # Safety net with cargo compartment
enlargement: guide the safety net up by tab 1 and hook it into eyelets 2.
102 Seats and stowing Overview of the tie-down eyes
1 Tie-down eyes Related topic: Loading guidelines ( page 92).
Overview of bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing direc- tions. # Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg). Do not use it to secure a load.
1 Bag hook
Related topic: Loading guidelines ( page 92).
EASY-PACK load-securing kit Notes on the EASY-PACK load-securing kit The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your cargo compartment for a variety of pur- poses. The components are located under the cargo compartment floor.
Seats and stowing 103 Inserting the brackets into the load rail
1 Bag containing the brackets and luggage holder
2 Telescopic rod
# Insert bracket 1 into the center of load rail 5.
# Press release knob 3 and slide bracket 1 into the desired position in load rail 5.
# Let go of release knob 3. # Press locking button 4.
Bracket 1 is locked in load rail 5.
104 Seats and stowing
# If necessary, fold tie-down eye 2 upwards. Tensioning the luggage holder Requirements: R The luggage holder is used to secure loads
against the side wall of the cargo compart- ment to prevent them from moving around. R Only secure loads with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs (7 kg) and which are small enough for the luggage holder to tightly and properly secure them.
# To install: insert two brackets 5 into the left or right load rail.
# Press release knob 1 of luggage holder 2 and pull the strap out slightly.
# Insert luggage holder 2 into brackets 5 and, while doing so, press release knob 3 and slide the luggage holder downwards until it engages.
# Press release knob 1 of the luggage holder and pull the strap out in the direction of the arrow.
# Place the load between the strap and the cargo compartment side wall.
# Using one hand, press release knob 1 of the luggage holder.
# With your other hand, let the strap go slowly until the load is secured.
# Make sure that locking button 4 on brack- ets 5 is pressed. Brackets 5 are secured in place on the load rail.
# To remove: press release knob 3 on respective bracket 5 and remove luggage holder 2 by pulling upwards and out.
Tensioning the telescopic rod
Requirement: The telescopic rod is used to secure loads against the rear seats to prevent them from moving around.
# Make sure that locking button 4 on brack- ets 2 is pressed. Brackets 2 are secured in place on the load rail.
# To remove: press release knob 3 on respective bracket 2 and remove telescopic rod 1 by pulling it up and out.
Seats and stowing 105
# To install: insert one bracket 2 into both the left and right load rails and slide it to the desired position.
# Insert telescopic rod 1 into brackets 2. # When doing so, press release knob 3 and
slide telescopic rod 1 down until it engages.
Opening the stowage space under the cargo compartment floor
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be thrown around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direc- tion. # Always close the cargo compartment
floor before a journey.
# To open: holding the ribbing, press handle 1 down.
# Lift the cargo compartment floor up by han- dle 1.
# Fold out the hook on the strap on the under- side of the cargo compartment floor and hook it into the rain trough.
106 Seats and stowing
# To close: unhook the hook from the rain trough and fasten it to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor.
# Fold the cargo compartment floor down and then press handle 1 down until it engages.
Attaching the roof rack
& WARNING Risk of injury by exceeding the maximum roof load
When you load the roof, the vehicle center of gravity rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steer- ing and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.
Requirements R Only use roof racks tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. R Make sure that you can raise the sliding sun-
roof fully and open the tailgate fully once the roof rack is installed. R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof rack is installed. The panor- amic sliding sunroof closes again automati- cally when it encounters resistance.
# Secure the roof rack to the roof railing. # Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Cup holder Installing or removing the cup holder in the center console
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu- pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi-
cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.
Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.
# To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull out cup holder 1.
# To install: insert cup holder 1 and slide back catch 2.
% The rubber mat of the cup holder can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, luke- warm water.
Seats and stowing 107
# To open: press on cup holder 1 or 2. # To fold in or out: place or remove a con-
tainer from cup holder 1 or 2.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter Using the ashtray in the front center console
* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart- ment under the ashtray
The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully
engaged.
108 Seats and stowing
# To open: push the cover of the ashtray upwards on its right 2 or left side.
# To remove the insert: press insert 1 upwards slightly and pull it out upwards.
# To install the insert: press insert 1 into the holder until the insert engages.
Using the rear passenger compartment ash- tray
# To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle edge.
# To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and out.
# To install the insert: install insert 1 from above and press down into the holder until it engages.
Using the cigarette lighter
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 109
# Press in cigarette lighter 1. The cigarette lighter will pop out automati- cally when the heating element is red-hot.
Sockets Using the 12 V socket in the front center console Requirements R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 Watt (15 A) R If you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com- partment open
# Lift up cover 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device.
Using the 12 V socket in the rear passenger compartment Requirement Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 watt (15 A)
# Briefly press the trim of cover 2. # Lift out cover 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam- aged connecting cables or sockets
If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the connecting cable or the 115 V socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet, you could receive an electric shock.
110 Seats and stowing
# Only use dry and damage-free connect- ing cables.
# When the ignition is switched off, ensure that the 115 V socket is dry.
# If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets pulled out of the paneling, immediately have the socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialized workshop.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor- rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock: R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Requirements R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 150 watts. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Open flap 3.
# Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
Using the 12 V socket in the cargo compart- ment Prerequisite Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 Watt (15 A)
# Lift up cover 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wireless charging of the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi- tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can-
not be thrown around in such situa- tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
Seats and stowing 111
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment
If you place objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may heat up excessively and even catch fire. # Do not place additional objects, espe-
cially those mode of metal, in the mobile phone stowage compartment.
112 Seats and stowing
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stow- age compartment
If you place objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be dam- aged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, storage
media or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquid is spilled in the mobile phone stow- age compartment, the mobile phone stowage compartment may be damaged. # Do not spill liquids into the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module.
R The charging function and wireless connec- tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available when the ignition is switched on.
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.
R Large mobile phones which do not fit into the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the exterior antenna.
R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile phone stowage com- partment when the air conditioning system is switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone stowage compartment is high- est when the controller in the glove box is closed.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone Requirements R Your mobile phone must be suitable for wire-
less charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone).
You can find a list of Qi-compatible mobile phones online at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect R To ensure more efficient charging and con- nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. R If possible, use the mat when charging.
# Place the mobile phone as close as possible to the center of mat 1 with the display facing up. The mobile phone is charged automatically, as is apparent from the way in which the
mobile phone reacts and from the charging symbol in the multimedia system display. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the multimedia system display. % To clean, mat 1 can be removed.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Installing/removing floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# To install: press studs 1 onto holders 2. # To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders
2.
Seats and stowing 113
114 Light and visibility
Exterior lighting Lighting systems and your responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch Operating the light switch
# 1 W Left-hand standing lamp # 2 X Right-hand standing lamp # 3 T Parking lights and license plate
lighting
# 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)
# 5 L Low beam/high beam # 6 R Switches the rear fog light on or off When low beam is activated, the indicator lamp for the parking lights is deactivated and replaced by the low beam indicator lamp. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipu- lations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
In the case of severe battery discharging, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automati- cally switched off to facilitate a future engine start.
The exterior lighting (except parking and stand- ing lamps) switches off automatically when the driver's door is opened. Automatic headlamp mode The parking lights, low beam and daytime run- ning lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the ignition status, whether the engine is running and on the ambient light.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Activating/deactivating the rear fog light Requirement The light switch is in the L or à position.
# Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. Operating the light combination switch
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right
Light and visibility 115
3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left # Pull or push the combination switch in the
relevant direction following the arrow. Switching on the high beam manually # Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
Turn the light switch to the L position. R Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam is deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for the high beam. # To switch off the high beam: move the combination switch back to its starting posi- tion. # To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly up to the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light flashes three times.
116 Light and visibility
# To indicate for a duration: press the combi- nation switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Cornering light Cornering light function
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning light
# Press button :.
Cornering light improves the illumination of the roadway over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low beam is switched on. The function is active: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned.
R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel is turned.
Traffic circle and intersection function: The cornering light is activated on both sides through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle or the intersection.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog- nize the following road users: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these or similar situations, the automatic high beam is not deactivated or is activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist switches automati- cally between: R Low beam R High beam
At speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam is automatically switched on.
Light and visibility 117
The high beam switches off automatically: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h). R If other road users are detected. R If street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds above approx. 31 mph (50 km/h): R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu-
lated automatically based on the distance to other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.
System limitations Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted if: R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog,
heavy rain or snow. R There is dirt on the sensors or if the sensors
are covered over.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off # To switch on: turn the light switch to
the à position.
118 Light and visibility
# Switch on the high beam using the combina- tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat- ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display comes on.
# To switch off: switch off the high beam using the combination switch.
Switching the daytime running lights on/off Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Light . Daytime Running Lights # Activate or deactivate the function.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Prerequisite The light switch is in the à position.
Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Light . Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off If you switch on this function, the exterior light- ing is switched on for a short time after the vehi- cle is switched off. # Set the switch-off delay time.
Switching the locator lighting on/off Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Light . Locator Lighting The exterior lighting remains lit for 30 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched off and automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Front overhead control panel
# 1 p Switches the front left-hand reading lamp on/off
# 2 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off
# 3 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off
# 4 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
# 5 p Switches the front right-hand read- ing lamp on/off
Control panel in the grab handle (rear passenger compartment)
Light and visibility 119
# Select a color.
Adjusting the brightness # Select Ambient Light Brightness. # To set the brightness: select the brightness
value using the left-hand setting element. # To set the zone: select the zone using the
right-hand setting element.
Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wiper on/off
# 1 p Switches the reading lamp on/off
Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Light Setting the color # Select Ambient Light Color.
Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay time Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Light . Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off # Set the switch-off delay time.
# 1 í Single wipe/î wiping with washer fluid
# 1 g Windshield wiper off # 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
120 Light and visibility # 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent # 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow # 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Switching the rear window windshield wiper on/off
# 1 è Switch
# 1 b Wipes with washer fluid # 2 I Switches on intermittent wiping # 3 0 Switches off intermittent wiping # 4 b Wipes with washer fluid
Changing the windshield wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position # Set the windshield wiper to the ° slow
continuous wiping position on the combina- tion switch.
# As soon as the wiper arms are vertical rela- tive to the hood, switch off the ignition.
# Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. Removing the wiper blades
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc- tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm to the stop.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.
Installing the wiper blades
Light and visibility 121
# Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 4 away from the wiper arm.
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. # Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
122 Light and visibility Maintenance display
% The duration of the color change varies depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blades Removing the wiper blade
# Fold wiper arm 4 away from the rear win- dow.
# Press both release clips 2. # Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow
3 away from wiper arm 4. # Remove wiper blade 1 in the direction of
arrow 5.
Installing the wiper blades
# Remove protective film 1 of the mainte- nance display on the tip of the newly instal- led wiper blade.
If the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.
# Switch the ignition off.
# Position new wiper blade 1 with recess 6 on lug 5.
# Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 3 onto the wiper arm until retaining clips 2 engage in bracket 4.
# Make sure that wiper blade 1 sits correctly. # Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-
dow.
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- judgment of distances when using the passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. As a result, you may misjudge the distance between you and the road user driving behind you, for example, when changing lanes. # Therefore, always look over your shoul-
der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
Light and visibility 123
# To fold in or out: briefly press button 1. % If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. # To adjust: select the required mirror using button 3 or 4.
124 Light and visibility
# Use button 2 to set the position of the mir- ror you have selected.
An outside mirror which has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again in the following manner: # Vehicles with electrically folding outside
mirrors: press and hold button 1. You will hear a click and the mirror audibly engage in position. The mirror is set into the correct position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
& WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro-
lyte, observe the following:
R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin and seek medical attention immedi- ately.
R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and outside mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the inside rearview mirror.
System limitations The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode in the following situations:
R the engine is switched off R reverse gear is engaged R interior lighting is switched on
Parking position of the passenger outside mirror
The parking position makes parking easier. The passenger outside mirror tilts down and shows the rear wheel on the front passenger side if: R the parking position is stored R the passenger mirror is selected R reverse gear is engaged
The passenger outside mirror moves back to its original position in the following situations: R if you shift the transmission to another trans-
mission position R when driving faster than 9 mph (15 km/h) R if you press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side
Saving the parking position of the passenger outside mirror Prerequisite Reverse gear must not be engaged when storing using the memory button.
# Move the passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1.
# Press memory button M. # Confirm immediately using button 1 to
store the setting. % No more than three seconds may pass
between pressing memory button M and button 1. The mirror setting process is can- celed after three seconds.
Light and visibility 125 Operating the sun visors
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function
Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Vehicle Settings . Automatic Mirror Folding # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
# Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1 down.
# Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to the side.
# Slide sun visor 1 horizontally as required. # Fold down additional sun visor 2.
# To store using the memory button: select the passenger outside mirror using button 2.
126 Light and visibility Infrared reflective windshield
The infrared reflective windshield is coated and prevents an excessive build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior against radio waves up into the gigahertz range. Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys- tems, can only be mounted on areas of the wind- shield which are permeable to radio waves 1. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi- ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated using an external light source.
Climate control 127
Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control In order for the air conditioning system, the monitoring of the level of pollution and the filter- ing of the air function correctly, an interior air fil- ter must always be used. Make sure that the fil- ter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cover and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Dual-zone climate control overview The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that the current function is activated.
1 Sets the driver's side temperature 2 Sets the air distribution 3 Sets the airflow or switch off climate control 4 Sets climate control to automatic mode
( page 128) 5 Defrosts the windshield 6 Calls up the climate control menu of the
multimedia system 7 Switches the rear window heater on/off 8 Activates or deactivates synchronization
( page 128) 9 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
( page 129)
A Switches the A/C function on/off ( page 128)
B Sets the front passenger side temperature
Overview of the multimedia system climate control settings The climate control settings can be adjusted using the climate control bar or the climate con- trol menu.
128 Climate control
1 To adjust the temperature and air distribu- tion and display the current setting
2 To call up the climate control menu and dis- play the current cooling setting
3 To adjust the airflow and temperature and display the current setting
Operating the climate control system Activating/deactivating climate control # To activate: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button. # To deactivate: set the airflow to level 0
using the H button.
% If climate control is deactivated, the win- dows can fog up more quickly. Deactivate climate control only briefly.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the control panel The A/C function cools, heats and dehumidifies the interior air in the vehicle. # Press the ¿ button. Deactivate the A/C function only briefly other- wise the windows can fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con- trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the à button. # To switch to manual mode: press the H
or _ button.
Air distribution settings
The symbols in the display indicate which vents the airflow is being directed through: R ¯ Defroster vent R P Center and side air vents R O Footwell vents R S Center, side and footwell vents R a Defroster and footwell vents R _ All vents R b Defroster, middle and side air vents R W Automatic air distribution
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the control panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution setting for the driver's side is adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the 0 button.
Climate control 129
The synchronization function is deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed.
Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the à button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the
¬ button. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode is switched off automati- cally. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Activating and deactivating ionization
Multimedia system: , Vehicle Ionization cleans and refreshes the interior air of the vehicle. The ionization of the interior air is odorless. # To call up the climate control bar: navigate
down until the climate control bar is active. # Call up the A/C On/Off climate control
menu. # Select Ionization. # Activate or deactivate the function. % The climate control bar can be called up
from any menu.
Perfume atomizer Activating or deactivating the fragrance sys- tem
Prerequisites R Automatic climate control is activated. R The glove box is closed.
Multimedia system: , Vehicle The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra- grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla- con located in the glove box. # To call up the climate control bar: navigate
down until the climate control bar is active. # Call up the A/C On/Off climate control
menu. # Select Air Freshener. # Activate or deactivate fragrancing. # Adjust the intensity. % The climate control bar can be called up
from any menu.
Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra- grance system
& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per- fume
If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con- tact with their eyes.
130 Climate control # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. # If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons
Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste.
#
Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.
Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.
Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa- tion sheet attached to the flacon.
1 Cap 2 Flacon
# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
# To remove: pull out the flacon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.
Information on the windshield heater
The windshield heater is switched on automati- cally: R If the ¬ button is activated.
After the vehicle is started the windshield heater is switched on automatically as needed.
Air vents Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Danger of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
Climate control 131 Adjusting the rear air vents
# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go.
# To adjust the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go.
# To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Opening/closing the air vent in the glove box
* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it.
132 Climate control # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. # At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C func- tion.
Requirement: Automatic climate control is activated.
1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
left or right.
Driving Switching on the power supply or ignition using the start/stop button
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, by: R Releasing the parking brake R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j R Starting the engine.
# Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning. # Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam- mable material on the exhaust system
Flammable materials brought in by either ani- mals or environmental influences may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the engine or exhaust system.
Driving and parking 133
# Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
Requirements R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
134 Driving and parking
# To switch on the power supply: press but- ton 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. You can now activate the windshield wiper, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol- lowing conditions are met: R The driver's door is open. R You press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada)
twice.
# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes. R You press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada)
once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but- ton
Requirements R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
# Shift the transmission to position j or i. # Depress the brake pedal and push button 1
(USA) or 2 (Canada) once. # If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
essential consumers and press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. # If the vehicle still does not start: start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the previously selected climate control setting is active.
Before starting, make sure: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked permit engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently filled. R The starter battery has sufficient charge.
% You can also set the temperature with your smartphone. Information on Mercedes me connect and other services: http:// www.mercedes.me.
Starting the vehicle using a smartphone
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap- ment due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.
Driving and parking 135
# Always secure the engine against unin- tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Requirements R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not armed. R The panic alarm is not armed. R The hazard warning lights are switched off. R The engine hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone: R After every vehicle start, the engine runs for
ten minutes. R You can carry out a maximum of two consec-
utive starting attempts. R You can stop the vehicle again at any time. R Further information can be found in the
smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning lights. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode If the vehicle cannot be started, the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears in the multifunction display.
# Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2.
The vehicle will start after a short while. If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked space 2 the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts however, SmartKey 1 must be located in marked space 2 during the entire journey. # Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start: # Leave SmartKey 1 in marked space 2. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
136 Driving and parking
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
To preserve the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. R Drive in drive program C or E. R Change up before the tachometer needle is
Ô of the way to the red area of the tachome- ter. R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following running-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer- tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys- tem effectiveness is not achieved until the end of this teach-in process. R Brake linings, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only ach- ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com- pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Driving tips
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
# Ensure floor mats and carpets cannot slip and provide sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not lay multiple floor mats or car- pets on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable footwear
Operation of the pedals may be restricted due to unsuitable footwear such as: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers
# When driving always wear suitable shoes in order to be able to operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ignition being switched off whilst the vehicle is in motion
If you switch off the ignition whilst the vehi- cle is in motion safety-relevant functions will be restricted or no longer available. This may effect the power steering system and brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake. # Do not switch off the ignition whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning. # Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur-
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run- ning.
Driving and parking 137
# Open a window on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup- ply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to driving under the influence of alcohol and drugs
Driving and the consumption of alcohol and/or drugs are an extremely dangerous combination. Even small quantities of alcohol or drugs can compromise your reflexes, per- ception and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive who has been drinking alcohol or taking drugs.
138 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over- heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal contin- uously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and the engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- ately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached operating temperature.
# Do not allow the wheels to spin.
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata- lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brake lining, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side. R Maintain a much greater distance to the vehi- cle in front.
To prevent salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions. R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next journey.
ECO start/stop function Operation of the ECO start/stop function The engine is switched off automatically: R If you brake the vehicle to a standstill in
transmission position h or i. R If all vehicle conditions for an automatic
engine stop are met.
The è symbol appears in the multifunction display when the vehicle is stationary. The engine is restarted automatically if: R You release the brake pedal with the trans-
mission in position h when the HOLD func- tion is not active. R You shift from transmission position j. R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R You switch to drive program S+. R You change the vehicle level. R An automatic engine start is necessary.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn- ing tone sounds. The Vehicle Operational Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting display message also appears in the multifunction display. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after one minute.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function
# Press button 1. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is switched on.
% Depending on the model, the button may also be located at a different position in the center console.
Driving and parking 139 ECO display The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economi- cal driving style. You can influence consumption if you: R drive with particular care R drive the vehicle in drive program E R observe the gearshift recommendations
The inner segment lights up green and the outer segment fills up: R 1 Moderate acceleration
140 Driving and parking
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Consistent speed
The inner segment is gray and the outer seg- ment empties: R 1 Sporty acceleration R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Fluctuations in speed
You have driven economically when: R the three outer segments are completely fil-
led simultaneously. R the ECO display border lights up.
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison to a driver with a very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus fr. Start. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs: R I (Individual): individual settings R S+ (Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving
style R S (Sport): sporty driving style R C (Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style R E (Economy): particularly economical driving
style
Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: R Drive system
- Engine and transmission management - ESP® - Distance Pilot DISTRONIC R Suspension R Steering
R Availability of the ECO start/stop function Operating the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.
Configuring drive program I Multimedia system: , Vehicle . DYNAMIC SELECT . Individual # Select the individual setting.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT selector lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by
oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, by: R Releasing the parking brake R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j R Starting the engine.
# Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi- tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position
h or k always depress the brake
Driving and parking 141
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans- mission caused by changing the trans- mission position during the journey
# Only change the transmission position when the vehicle is stationary.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans- mission position. The current transmission posi- tion is displayed in the multifunction display.
142 Driving and parking j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows k in the multifunction display.
Shifting to neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. Transmission position display i is shown in the multifunction display.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N even if the ignition is switched off: # Start the vehicle. # Depress the brake pedal and shift to neutral
i. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off.
% If you leave the SmartKey in the vehicle and then exit the vehicle, the automatic trans- mission remains in neutral i
Engaging park position P
# Press button 1. Transmission position display j is shown in the multifunction display.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k.
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows h in the multifunction display. When the automatic transmission is in transmis- sion position h, it shifts the gears automati- cally. This is determined by: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The road speed
Manual gear shifting
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur-
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
Driving and parking 143
# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The current gear is displayed in the multifunction display.
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.
# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position h appears in the multifunction display.
% If you select the Manual drive setting in drive program I, manual gearshifting is per- manently activated.
Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style.
144 Driving and parking
# If gearshift recommendation message 1 is shown in the multifunction display, shift to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel-
erator pedal beyond the pressure point. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The auto- matic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving.
# Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.
Glide mode function
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consump- tion. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain. R The engine speed corresponds to the idle
speed.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi- tions are met: R Drive program E is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The course of the road is suitable, for exam-
ple, no steep uphill or downhill gradients. R You are no longer depressing the accelerator
or brake pedal.
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive
(engine management) when in drive program I.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or Active Brake Assist: Glide mode is also deactivated depend- ing on the traffic situation and the vehicle then switches to overrun mode. This further reduces fuel consumption. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow- ing parameters: R Gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Obstacle detection R Operating condition of the engine
Refueling Refueling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion caused by fuel
Fuels are highly inflammable. # You must avoid fire, open flames, creat-
ing sparks and smoking. # Before refueling, switch off the engine
and, if installed in your vehicle, the sta- tionary heater.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your health # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapors. # Keep children away from fuel.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of explosion or fire due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapors. # Always touch the metal vehicle body
before opening the fuel filler cap or touching the pump nozzle.
This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up.
Driving and parking 145
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Fuel that does not conform to the required quality can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. # Only use the fuel recommended.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur premium
grade fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Do not refuel using: R Diesel R E15, E85, E100
146 Driving and parking
R Gasoline containing methanol (M15, M30, M85, M100)
R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi- cles with a gasoline engine.
# Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys- tem. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- fied specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com- pletely.
* NOTE Do not overfill the fuel tank as this may damage the fuel system.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
* NOTE Do not overfill the fuel tank as oth- erwise fuel could spray out when the pump nozzle is removed.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Prerequisite The vehicle must be unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
Refueling
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type # Press fuel filler flap 1.
# Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it.
# Insert the fuel filler cap into holder 2. # Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Parking Switching off the vehicle with the start/stop button
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
# In particular, do not park on dry grass- land or harvested grain fields.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j. R Starting the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment. # Never leave children and animals unat-
tended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Driving and parking 147 * NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the driv-
etrain caused by the vehicle rolling away # Always properly secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
# On uphill or downhill inclines, turn the front wheels towards the curb.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
148 Driving and parking
# Press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. % When you switch off the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for five minutes.
Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning. # Never leave the engine running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of injury and entrapment when opening the garage door using the garage door opener
When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. # When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is within the sweep of the garage door.
Only operate the garage door opener on the fol- lowing garage doors: R Garage doors with a safety stop and revers-
ing feature. R Garage doors which conform to the current
U.S. safety standards.
Prior to programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage and switch off the engine.
# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
Driving and parking 149
# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- cator lamp flashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control 5 at a distance of 1 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards buttons 1, 2 or 3.
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin- uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro- gramming was successful. The rolling code must also be synchronized with the garage door system.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.
% The remote control for the garage door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements R The garage door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or exterior gate drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects,
are located outside the sweep of the garage door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com- pleted.
150 Driving and parking % Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door drive. Troubleshooting when programming the remote control
# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported.
# Replace the batteries in remote control 5. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles at
a distance between 1 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 sec- onds before trying another position.
# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every posi- tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
# Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends.
# Align the antenna line of the garage door opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro- gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515. R On the Internet at http:// www.homelink.com/mercedes.
Opening/closing the garage door
Prerequisite The corresponding button is programmed to operate the garage door.
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the garage door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the garage door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory
# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3.
Radio equipment approval numbers for the garage door opener R Egypt: TAC.2511151293.WIR
R Andorra: CE R Australia: R-NZ R Barbados: MED1578 R Chile: 2488/DFRS20576/F-74 R European Union: CE R Gibraltar: CE R Iceland: CE R Jordan: TRC/LPD/2015/299 R Canada: 4112A-MUAHL5 R Kuwait: CE R Liechtenstein: CE R Mexico: RCPGEMU15-0448 R Monaco: CE R New Zealand: R-NZ R Norway: CE R Russian Federation: not required R Saudi Arabia: TA 10525 R Switzerland: CE R South Africa: TA-2015/1386
Driving and parking 151
R Turkey: not required R United Arab Emirates: ER41849/15 R United States: NZLMUAHL5
Electric parking brake Automatically applying the electric parking brake
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If you leave children unaccompanied in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the transmission out of park
position j. R Starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment.
152 Driving and parking
# Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans- mission is in position j and one of the follow- ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also engaged: R The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the
vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary. R Parking Pilot is keeping the vehicle station-
ary.
This is only the case if one of the following con- ditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
Releasing the electric parking brake auto- matically The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The engine is running. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k.
R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow- ing conditions must be fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R You move the transmission out of transmis-
sion position j or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed.
If the electric parking brake is released, the F (USA) or ! (CANADA) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Applying or releasing the electric parking brake manually
# To apply: push handle 1. The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster.
# To release: switch on the ignition.
# Pull handle 1. The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking # Press and hold handle 1.
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill: R The electric parking brake is applied. R The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica-
tor lamp appears in the instrument clus- ter.
Parking the vehicle for a long period R If you leave the vehicle parked for longer
than four weeks, damage may occur to the battery. R If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. R Information on parking your vehicle for an extended period can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Driving and parking 153
Standby mode
Standby mode function Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The vehicle can be parked over a long period
of time without losing power. R The vehicle battery is preserved. R The maximum period out of use is displayed
in the multimedia system display. R Functions such as interior protection or tow-
away protection are not available. R The connection to online services is interrup-
ted.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed period out of use may cause inconvenience, i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine.
154 Driving and parking
The starter battery must be charged in the fol- lowing situations: R The vehicle's period out of use must be
extended. R A message appears in the multimedia system
display explaining that the battery charge is insufficient for standby mode.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
Activating or deactivating standby mode Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Vehicle Settings . Standby Mode # Activate or deactivate the function.
When you activate the function, a prompt appears. # Select Yes. Standby mode is activated.
Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu- vering the vehicle. The driving systems are aids and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these sys- tems.
Function of the radar sensors Some driving and driving safety systems use radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equipment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grille. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush . The sensors must not be covered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging loads or radar-reflecting stickers. Following an impact and in the event of
associated damage, which may not be visible, to the bumpers or radiator grille, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. The driver assistance system may no longer work properly.
Overview of driving and driving safety sys- tems
In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety systems: R 360° Camera ( page 184) R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
( page 155) R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( page 165) R AIR BODY CONTROL ( page 174) R Active Brake Assist ( page 159) R Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 195) R ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 191) R BAS (Brake Assist System) ( page 155) R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
( page 159)
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ( page 156)
R DRIVE PILOT ( page 171) R HOLD function ( page 173) R Steering Pilot ( page 171) R Parking Pilot ( page 186) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 178) R Rear view camera ( page 181) R Cruise control ( page 163) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
( page 193)
R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h).
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster after the engine is started.
Functions of ABS (anti-lock braking system)
ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv- ing situations: R During braking, the wheels are prevented
from blocking, for example due to maximum full-stop braking or insufficient traction of the tires. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys- tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa- tion.
Driving and parking 155
# Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres-
sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
156 Driving and parking
Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
ESP® monitors and improves driving stability and traction, particularly in the following situations: R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads.
R When braking. R In strong sidewinds when you are driving
faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP® is deactivated if the ESP® OFF å warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® when braking.
ESP® is intervening if the ESP® ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster: R Do not deactivate ESP®.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary.
R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R when using snow chains R in deep snow R on sand or gravel
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. If the ESP® ÷ warning lamp lights up continu- ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe any information which may be displayed in the instrument cluster: R Warning and indicator lamps ( page 368) R Display messages ( page 326)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin.
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif- ferent weather and road conditions as well as
Driving and parking 157 the driver's preferred driving style. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
158 Driving and parking
ESP® characteristics per drive program Drive program C (Comfort) E (Economy)
ESP® mode ESP® Comfort
S (Sport)
ESP® Sport
S+ (Sport Plus)
ESP® Sport Plus
Characteristics
These drive programs provide the ideal balance between traction and stability. Select drive program E or C in difficult road con- ditions, such as in snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain.
This drive program continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu- siastic driver a more active driving style. Only select drive program S in good road condi- tions, for example on dry road and clear stretches of road.
The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer- ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows a more active driving style to be adopted. Only select drive program S+ in good road con- ditions, for example on dry road and clear stretches of road.
Driving and parking 159
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta- bility Program) Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Assistance . Electronic Stability Program # Activate or deactivate the function. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn- ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Functions of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi- cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ- ual brake application on one side.
Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis- tribution) EBD is characterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with the Driving Assistance
package: Evasive Steering Assist Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, you will be warned visually and acousti- cally. If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn- ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti- cal situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the visual and acoustic warning occurs simultaneously with the braking applica- tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak- ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. This increases the brake pressure up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary. If the autonomous braking function or the situa- tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated, if the vehicle is equipped with these.
160 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R give an unnecessary warning or brake the
vehicle R not give a warning or not brake the vehi-
cle.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
# Be ready to brake and take evasive action if necessary.
Also observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: Distance warning function
The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster ·.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi- ded it is safe to do so.
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles traveling in Stationary vehicles front
Crossing vehicles
Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes- trians
Vehicles without Driv- ing Assistance pack- age Vehicles with Driving Assistance package
up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 50 mph
(250 km/h)
(80 km/h)
up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 62 mph
(250 km/h)
(100 km/h)
no reaction up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
no reaction up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
Driving and parking 161
Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in Stationary vehicles front
Crossing vehicles
Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes- trians
Vehicles without Driv- ing Assistance pack- age Vehicles with Driving Assistance package
up to approx. 124 mph up to approx. 31 mph
(200 km/h)
(50 km/h)
up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 62 mph
(250 km/h)
(100 km/h)
no reaction up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
no reaction up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in Stationary vehicles front
Crossing vehicles
Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes- trians
Vehicles without Driv- ing Assistance pack- age Vehicles with Driving Assistance package
up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 50 mph
(250 km/h)
(80 km/h)
up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 62 mph
(250 km/h)
(100 km/h)
no reaction up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
no reaction up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h)
162 Driving and parking
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Depressing the accelerator pedal fully. R Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist cancels the intervention when at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid an obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac- teristics: R Can detect stationary or crossing pedes-
trians. R Can assist the driver with additional steering
assistance if a swerving maneuver is detec- ted.
R Can be activated by an abrupt steering move- ment during a swerving maneuver.
R Can assist during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
R Can react from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx- imately 43 mph (70 km/h).
R You can prevent the assistance at any time by active steering.
& WARNING Risk of an accident despite Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In addition, the steering support of Evasive Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can: R give an unnecessary warning or provide
assistance R not give a warning or not provide assis-
tance
# Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
# Be ready to brake and take evasive action if necessary.
# Prevent the assistance by actively steer- ing in non-critical driving situations.
# Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes- trians are close to the path of your vehi- cle.
Also observe the system limitations of Evasive Steering Assist.
System limitations Active Brake Assist may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar source interference, for example strong radar reflections in parking garages.
R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed.
The system may not react correctly: R In complex traffic stations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified. R To pedestrians or vehicles if they move
quickly into the sensor detection range. R To pedestrians who are hidden by other
objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not recognized as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects. R On bends with a tight radius.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Assistance . Active Brake Assist Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack- age: The settings can be made after starting the vehicle. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: The settings can be made when the ignition is switched on. % It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist switched on. The moment of warning or intervention can be adjusted as follows: # Select Warning/Brake Applic.: Early: your
selection is retained when the vehicle is next started. # Select Warning/Brake Appl.: Medium: your selection is retained when the vehicle is next started.
Driving and parking 163
# Select Warning/Brake Applic.: Late: your selection is retained when the vehicle is next started.
# Select: Warning/Brake Applic.: Off: Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack- age: The autonomous braking function is switched off. When the vehicle is next star- ted, the medium setting is automatically selected. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: The autonomous braking function is switched off. Evasive Steering Assist is unavailable. When the ignition is next star- ted, the medium setting is selected automati- cally and Evasive Steering Assist is available.
% When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the multifunction display.
Speed control cruise control Function of cruise control Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi- cle automatically in order to maintain a previ- ously stored speed.
164 Driving and parking
If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can operate cruise control with the cruise control lever. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con- trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- ing in your lane.
System limitations Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Do not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads.
R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
R When visibility is poor. Operating cruise control
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unknown stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed. # If the stored speed is not known, store
the desired speed again.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat- ing and wearing too quickly.
Requirements R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven-
ing. R The driving speed must be at least 15 mph
(20 km/h).
# Stores current speed 2 (once after starting the vehicle).
or # Calls up stored speed 2. # Deactivates cruise control 1.
or # Press the lever beyond the pressure point:
stored speed is increased 3 or reduced 4 by 10 mph (10 km/h). If cruise control has been deactivated, the cur- rent driven speed is adopted with 3 or 4. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared.
Setting the speed limit for winter tires Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Vehicle Settings . Limit Speed (Winter Tyres) # Select the speed or deactivate the function.
# Press the lever briefly: stored speed is increased 3 or reduced 4 by 1 mph (1 km/h).
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Function of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: R Maintains the set speed and accelerates or
decelerates the vehicle if the distance from the vehicle in front permits.
Driving and parking 165
R Assists you in maintaining the distance from the vehicle in front and can bring your vehi- cle to a standstill if necessary.
R Brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum possible braking power. If greater deceleration performance is required, a vis- ual and acoustic warning is given and you must then intervene yourself.
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack- age: Responds in urban speed ranges to sta- tionary vehicles (except bicycles, motorcy- cles and pedestrians) if conditions are suffi- cient to enable detection.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis- tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. If all activation conditions are met, you can acti- vate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC during a journey
166 Driving and parking
or while stationary. When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, a speed is stored which the driver can increase or reduce at any time. The speed can be adjusted between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack- age: The speed can be adjusted between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 130 mph (210 km/h). Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack- age: In conjunction with navigation systems, Dis- tance Pilot DISTRONIC prevents prohibited over- taking on the right at speeds over 50 mph (80 km/h) in right-hand traffic and overtaking on the left in left-hand traffic on freeways and highspeed major roads. If you activate the turn signal indicator to change lanes, the vehicle will accelerate more briskly to the set speed under the following conditions: R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. R If the driving speed is higher than 45 mph
(70 km/h). R If the driven speed drops below the stored
speed.
R If the traffic situation in the overtaking lane permits a safe lane change.
Drive program The DYNAMIC SELECT switch allows you to change the driving style of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive program is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards fuel economy, comfort or dynamic performance ( page 140).
System limits Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack- age: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active in the 0 mph (0 km/h) to 130 mph (210 km/h) speed range. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If the windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the fol- lowing situations: R In road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. R In parking garages or at toll stations. R On roads with steep uphill or downhill gradi- ents.
Tips Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations. In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is then deactivated: R When cornering, entering and exiting a bend. R When not driving in the center of the lane. R When other vehicles are changing lane. R If there are narrow vehicles.
R If there are obstacles and stationary vehi- cles.
R If there are crossing vehicles, pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.
Display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the assistance graphic and in the speedometer
1 Vehicle ahead 2 Distance indicator 3 Set specified distance 4 Own vehicle
Driving and parking 167
1 Speed of vehicle ahead 2 Stored speed
Displays in the multifunction display When activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or when changing the stored speed, the new stored speed is shown for around five seconds in the ç multifunction display 50 mph (70 km/h). When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active, the set stored speed is displayed next to the ç sym- bol. When distance control is active, the symbol is shown in green. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack- age: On freeways or high-speed major roads the
ç symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
Operating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is impaired
The Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react: R To people or animals. R To stationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles (vehicles with- out the Driving Assistance Package). R To stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles, if conditions are not sufficient to enable detection (vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package). R To oncoming vehicles and crossing traf- fic.
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.
168 Driving and parking
# Always carefully observe the traffic con- ditions and be ready to brake at all times.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi- ted detectability of road users and traffic situations
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In these conditions, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: R Give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle. R Neither give a warning nor intervene. R Accelerate or brake unexpectedly. # Continue driving with care and be ready
to brake, particularly if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC warns you.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient deceleration by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehi- cle with up to 50 % of the maximum possible braking power. If this deceleration is not suf- ficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Apply the brakes yourself in these situa-
tions and try to take evasive action.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Dis- tance Pilot DISTRONIC still being activa- ted when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC only, it can roll away in the following situa- tions: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply.
R If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactiva- ted with the cruise control lever, for example by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
R If the electrics in the engine compart- ment, the battery or the fuses are tam- pered with.
R If the battery is disconnected. R If the vehicle is accelerated, for example
by a vehicle occupant.
# Always deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unknown stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
# If the stored speed is not known, store the desired speed again.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unex- pected acceleration by Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpect- edly accelerate to the speed stored. R This speed may be too high for a turning
lane or an exit lane. R If driving in the right lane, this speed may
be so high that you pass vehicles driving on the left (in countries where traffic drives on the right). R If driving in the left lane, this speed may be so high that you pass vehicles driving on the right (in countries where traffic drives on the left).
Driving and parking 169
Always carefully observe the traffic condi- tions and be ready to brake at all times.
R The engine hood must be closed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Dis- tance Pilot DISTRONIC pulling away auto- matically
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC performs an automatic driving-off procedure, the vehicle may accelerate unexpectedly. Where necessary, brake the vehicle yourself and take evasive action.
Requirements R The vehicle's engine or must be switched on. R The electric parking brake must be released. R Parking Pilot is not being used to park the
vehicle or to exit from a parking space. R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven-
ing. R The transmission must be in position D. R The driver door, front passenger door and the
rear doors must be closed.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # To store current speed 2.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. or # To call up stored speed 2.
170 Driving and parking # To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 1.
# To increase 3 or reduce 4 the speed.
# To reduce 5 or increase 6 the specified distance from the vehicle in front.
Pulling away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Requirement: a speed must have been previ- ously stored. # Remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you 2.
or # Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed.
Collision warning If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is unable to suffi- ciently decelerate the vehicle in order to prevent it from approaching the vehicle in front, you will be warned visually and acoustically. An intermit- tent warning tone will then sound and the dis- tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- ment cluster. # Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front. or # Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
Driving and parking 171
Function of DRIVE PILOT The DRIVE PILOT function is available only on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. DRIVE PILOT includes the following driving and driving safety systems: R Steering Pilot ( page 171) R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( page 165)
Steering Pilot Function of Steering Pilot Steering Pilot is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package. R Steering Pilot is operational at speeds up to
130 mph (210 km/h) and helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. R It uses as a reference the vehicle in front or the lane markings, depending on the driven speed. R Steering Pilot requires you as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all
times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. R Steering Pilot can be overridden at any time by steering the vehicle yourself. R If the system detects that there are no lane markings, it uses the vehicle ahead as a ref- erence up to a speed of 80 mph (130 km/h). R When the system is actively steering, the è symbol is shown in green in the multi- function display.
Steering Pilot system limits Steering Pilot has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane. If detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Steering Pilot switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. During the transition from the active to passive status, the è symbol is shown as enlarged and flashes yellow. Once the system is passive the è symbol is grayed out in the multifunction display.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflection from other vehi- cles (e.g. if the road surface is wet). R If the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera. R If no, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area. R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is narrow and winding.
172 Driving and parking
R if there are highly variable shade conditions on the road.
R If there are obstacles such as traffic guid- ance posts on the lane or projecting out into the lane.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On very sharp bends. R When towing a trailer. R If you actively change lane without switching
on the turn signal indicator.
Information on the Steering Pilot Steering Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- ing in lane. Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free (shoulder view).
Steering and contact detection Steering Pilot requires you as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to cor- rect the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane.
The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. If you are not steering yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a pro- longed period of time, the system will, depend- ing on the situation, first alert you with a visual warning. 1 appears in the multifunction display. If you are still not steering the vehicle yourself or if you have not taken hold of the steering wheel, a warning tone sounds in addition to the warning message to remind you to take control of the vehicle.
The warning message does not appear or disap- pears if one of the following conditions are met: R The driver steers the vehicle. R The driver presses a steering wheel button or
operates Touch Control.
Active Emergency Stop Assist If the driver continues to ignore the acoustic warning, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC reduces the speed. If the driver still does not respond, the vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Pressing a steering wheel button or operat-
ing Touch Control R Activating or deactivating Steering Pilot or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
The driver must be ready to take control of the vehicle at any time.
Activating Steering Pilot
Requirements R ESP® must be switched on, but not interven-
ing. R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC must be activated.
Information on Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle and it can roll away. # Therefore, swiftly move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi- cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
# If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2.
HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand- still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, such as when pulling away on steep slopes.
Driving and parking 173
System limits The incline must not be greater than 30%. Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle can roll away in the following situations: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. R If the electrics in the engine compart- ment, the battery or the fuses are tam- pered with. R If the battery is disconnected. # Always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving the vehicle.
174 Driving and parking
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activa- ted, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer- tain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: # During towing # In a car wash
Requirements R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati-
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The electric parking brake is released. R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not activated. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time depress further until the ë display appears in the multifunction display. # Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis-
play disappears from the multifunction dis- play. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow- ing situations: R If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has been activa- ted. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: When transmission position j is selected. R When the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by the transmission position j or by the electric parking brake: R When the seat belt is unfastened and the
driver's door is opened. R When the engine is switched off. R When there is a malfunction in the system or
if the power supply is insufficient.
AIR BODY CONTROL AIR BODY CONTROL function AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com- fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually adjusting the vehicle level is also available. AIR BODY CONTROL comprises: R Air suspension with variable spring rate R Automatic level control system
Driving and parking 175
R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption
R Manual level adjustment R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment)
R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
Available suspension settings Drive program C (Comfort)
E (Economy)
Characteristics
R Comfortable suspension tuning R Normal level R When driving at speeds above 78 mph (125 km/h), the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) R When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again by 0.6 in (15 mm)
R Comfortable suspension tuning R The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds
176 Driving and parking
Drive program S (Sport)
S+ (Sport Plus)
Characteristics
R Firmer suspension tuning R The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds
R Even firmer suspension tuning R The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds
Setting the vehicle level
& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high
If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv- ing characteristics may be impaired due to the higher vehicle center of gravity. The vehicle may tip over more quickly on a bend, for example. # Always select as low a vehicle level as
possible and adapt your driving style accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi- cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi- cle lowering
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: When you unload lug- gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.
Requirements R The vehicle's engine must be switched on. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than
37 mph (60 km/h).
Driving and parking 177
Raising the vehicle
# Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is raised by 1 in (25 mm) com- pared to the normal level.
Your selection is saved. % In drive program All-Terrain, the vehicle can-
not be raised further using button 1.
The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit- uations: R When driving faster than 62 mph
(100 km/h). R When driving between 50 mph (80 km/h)
and 62 mph (100 km/h) for approximately three minutes. R After selecting a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.
Lowering the vehicle # Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.
178 Driving and parking Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Functions of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver- ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). You can set the warning tone in the mul- timedia system so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) ( page 180). If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is unavailable.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system If Parking Pilot is deactivated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up win- dow for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Vehicles with Parking Pilot and rear view cam- era Vehicles with Parking Pilot and 360° Camera
System limitations Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa- rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Passive side impact protection Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec- tion range. In order for an object to be detected,
Driving and parking 179
the sensors in the front and rear bumper must detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or maneuvering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta- cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The lateral segments light up orange or red, depending on the distance to the obstacle.
Color
Lateral distance in cm
Red Orange
< 30 30 - 60
In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis- played.
1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera- tional in the front and rear
2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and can also warn the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange) and rear (red)
When you switch off the ignition, the stored obstacles are deleted. After the engine is restar- ted, obstacles must be detected again, before a new warning can be issued.
180 Driving and parking
System limitations The system limitations for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro- tection. Objects placed next to the vehicle, or pedes- trians who approach the side of the vehicle will not be detected. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking the vehicle, pay particular
attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower- pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.
If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.
# Press button 2. % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located in the center console. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Parking Pilot . Set Warning Tones
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Adjust the value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Adjust the value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta- cle. # Select Warn Early. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Driving and parking 181
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives an audible warning. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Reversing camera Function of the rear view camera
When you engage reverse gear, the image from rear view camera 1 is displayed in the multime- dia system. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position. This helps you to orientate
yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that, when parking or maneuvering, there are no persons, animals or other objects in the maneuvering area. You can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rear-view mirror.
System limitations The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R If the trunk lid or tailgate is open. R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog. R If the light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
182 Driving and parking
R If the camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog- ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera ( page 260).
R If the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket or bicycle rack).
Vehicles without Parking Pilot The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear area 2 White guide line without turning the steering
wheel, vehicle width including the outside mirrors (static) 3 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (surface area driven over) depending on the current steer- ing wheel angle (dynamic) 4 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
5 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
6 Vehicle center axis (locating aid) 7 Bumper 8 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
Wide-angle view Vehicles with Parking Pilot The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Driving and parking 183
Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (surface area driven over) depending on the current steer- ing wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis- tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))
% If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails in the rear: R The rear segments are shown in red when backing up. R The rear segments are hidden when driv- ing forwards.
When Parking Pilot is active, the lanes are displayed in green. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out.
184 Driving and parking
Wide-angle view Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Parking Pilot . Open Camera Cover # Activate or deactivate the function.
360° camera Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil- ity. The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that, when parking or maneuvering, there are no persons, animals or other objects in the maneuvering area. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
Views of the 360° Camera You can select from different views:
1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras
in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam-
era 6 Top view with trailer view
Top view
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position
2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less
3 Your vehicle from above If the distance to the object lessens, the color of the warning display changes 2. From a dis- tance of approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) the warn- ing display is shown in orange. From a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) the warning dis- play is shown in red.
Driving and parking 185
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray. % If the entire system fails, the inner segments
of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear: R the rear segments are shown in red when
backing up. R the rear segments are hidden when driv-
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out.
Guide lines
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) % When Parking Pilot is active, the lanes are
displayed in green.
186 Driving and parking
The guide lines in the multimedia system dis- play show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.
System limitations The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R If the doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R If the trunk lid or tailgate is open. R If there is heavy rain, snow or fog. R If the ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. R If the camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog-
ged up. R If the vehicle components in which the cam-
eras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum- stances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi- tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera ( page 260).
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera The Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system. # Engage reverse gear. # In the multimedia system, select the desired
view.
Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera (Parking Pilot) Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Parking Pilot . Open Camera Cover # Activate or deactivate the function.
Parking Pilot
Function of Parking Pilot Parking Pilot is an electronic parking assistance system which uses ultrasound and is automati- cally activated during forward travel. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). When all the conditions are fulfilled, the c symbol appears in the multi- function display and the system automatically searches for and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle parallel and perpendic- ular to the direction of travel. If Parking Pilot is activated, suitable parking spaces are displayed in the multimedia system. The ë symbol appears in the multifunction display. The arrows show which side of the road free parking spaces are located. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Parking Pilot calculates a suitable vehicle path and assists you in the parking and exiting procedure. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Park- ing Pilot changes gear, accelerates, brakes and steers the vehicle.
Driving and parking 187
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, park- ing and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Parking Pilot is canceled if, among other things, one of the following actions is carried out: R You switch off Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You switch off Parking Pilot. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You engage j. R ESP® intervenes.
Parking Pilot system limits Objects located above or below the detection range of Parking Pilot are not detected when the parking space is being measured. These are also not taken into account when the parking maneu- ver is calculated, for example, overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or the boundaries of the parking space. In some
circumstances, Parking Pilot may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Parking Pilot
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Parking Pilot may steer too early. R Vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Parking Pilot.
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Parking Pilot on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Parking Pilot, for example, in the fol- lowing situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice or
packed snow or in heavy rain. R If you are transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient. R If you have installed snow chains.
Parking Pilot may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, for example: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Parking Pilot will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations: R If two parking spaces are located immedi-
ately next to each other. R If the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb.
188 Driving and parking
Parking Pilot will not assist you with parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations: R If the parking space is on a curb. R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle, for example, a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Parking Pilot % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different position in the center console.
# Press button 1. The Parking Pilot view appears on the display of the multimedia system. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.
% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path.
# If you have driven past a suitable parking space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.
# Select desired parking space 4. # Where necessary, select the parking direc-
tion: forwards or reverse. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on the selected parking space and parking direc- tion. # Confirm the selected parking space.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi- cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Park- ing Pilot.
# If, for example, the Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the display of the multi- media system: select the corresponding transmission position. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Pilot Finished, Take Control of the Vehi-
Driving and parking 189
cle display message appears. Further maneuver- ing may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro- cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. The parking procedure can then be continued. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position will be changed again. If the vehicle has not yet reached the parking space, changing gear will result in the parking procedure being canceled.
Exiting a parking space with Parking Pilot
Requirement: You can only exit a parking space with Parking Pilot if you have previously parked the vehicle with Parking Pilot.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi- cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle.
# Press button 1. The Parking Pilot view appears on the display of the multimedia system.
190 Driving and parking
# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3.
% The vehicle path shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path.
# Confirm to start the exiting process.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi- cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Park- ing Pilot.
# If, for example, the Engage Forward Gear message appears in the display of the multi- media system: select the corresponding transmission position. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle exits of the parking space.
As soon as the Parking Pilot Finished, Take Control of Vehicle message appears in the display of
the multimedia system, you must accelerate, brake, steer and change gears yourself again.
Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, a symbol appears on the camera image of the mul- timedia system.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and traffic situations. In such cases, Drive Away Assist might: R Warn you without reason and limit the
vehicle speed. R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle
speed.
Driving and parking 191
# Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec- essary.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit- uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals. R If the wrong gear is selected.
The Drive Away Assist function is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
R If the maneuvering assistance function is activated in the multimedia system.
Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and when driving with a trailer.
Cross Traffic Alert % Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist ( page 193). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space. If a critical sit- uation is detected, a warning symbol appears on the camera image of the multimedia system. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To do this, the function uses the radar sensors in the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is continually monitored. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.
The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under the following conditions: R If Blind Spot Assist is activated. R If the vehicle is reversing at walking pace. R If the maneuvering assistance function is
activated in the multimedia system. Cross Traffic Alert is unavailable on inclines and when driving with a trailer. Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis- tance Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Parking Pilot . Maneuvering Assistance # Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto- nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati- gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
192 Driving and parking
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour- neys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings. R Standard: normal system sensitivity R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap- ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra- tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis- play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last
break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST.
if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limitations ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations: R If you have been driving for less than 30
minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor-
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Pilot function of Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently.
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con- tinuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. change drivers or take a break). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Assistance . Attention Assist Selection options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind your vehicle and 10 ft (3 m) directly next to your vehicle.
Driving and parking 193
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx- imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse- quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains on, all other detec- ted vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation and maintain a safe dis- tance at the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi- cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles.
System limitations The detection capability of Blind Spot Assist can be restricted in the following situations: R If the sensors are dirty or obscured. R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain, snow or spray. R If narrow vehicles are within the monitoring
range, e.g. bicycles.
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor- ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example, trucks, for a prolonged period.
194 Driving and parking
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor- recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa- ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your-
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to the fol- lowing: R Overtaking vehicles closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area R Vehicles approaching and overtaking you
at a very different speed
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- uations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation and maintain a safe dis- tance at the side of the vehicle.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir- ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis- play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro- priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limitations
Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R There are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds. R You clearly brake or accelerate. R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated. R Tire pressure loss or a defective tire has
been detected. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con-
nection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Assistance . Blind Spot Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.
Driving and parking 195 Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin- tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by means of a vibration in the steering wheel
196 Driving and parking
and a course-correcting brake application guides you back into your lane. You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer- ing wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings. R A front wheel passes over the lane markings.
You will also be guided back into your lane by means of a course-correcting brake application if the following conditions are met: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both sides. R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark-
ing.
Whether a warning is issued and when this occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity setting (standard or adaptive). If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It can- not take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Vehicles with Lane Tracking package: If the lane markings are solid lines and you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake application can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or Driving Assistance Plus package: If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake application can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. In the case of a broken lane mark- ing being detected, a brake application will only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. The brake application is available in the speed range between 40 mph (60 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis- play 1 appears in the multifunction display.
System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate. R You have switched on the turn signal indica-
tor. R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration.
R ESP® is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con-
nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R There is poor visibility, for example due to
insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R There is glare, for example from the sun, reflections or oncoming traffic. R There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R No or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, for example in a con- struction area.
R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered. R The distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R The road is very narrow and winding.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or Driving Assistance Plus package: Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor several areas around the vehicle. If the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered with snow, the system may be impaired or may not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor- recting brake application occurs.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Lane Keeping Assist warning
A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the origi- nal lane.
Driving and parking 197
# Always steer, brake or accelerate your- self, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor- recting brake application.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite inter- vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropri- ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. The brake application can be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. # Always make sure that there is suffi-
cient distance to the side for other traf- fic or obstacles.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.
198 Driving and parking
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: R give an unnecessary warning R not give a warning # Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Prerequisite The driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h).
# Press button 2. If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Lane Keeping Assist is activated. When lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic are shown in white.
Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist With the standard or adaptive setting, you can influence when the warning vibration of Lane Keeping Assist takes place.
In both the standard and adaptive settings, no warning vibration occurs in the following situa- tions: R You have switched on the turn signal indica-
tor. R A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
In the adaptive setting, there will also be no warning vibration in the following situations: R The vehicle is accelerated or braked consid-
erably. R You steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly. R You cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Setting the sensitivity of Active Lane Keep- ing Assist Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Assistance . Active Lane Keeping Assist
Options # Select Adaptive or Standard.
Instrument Display overview
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction
If the instrument display has failed or mal- functioned, you cannot recognize function restrictions applying to safety relevant sys- tems. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos- sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument Display (standard)
1 Speedometer 2 Multifunction display 3 Tachometer 4 Coolant temperature display 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica-
tor The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the system status for the following: R Cruise control ( page 163) R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( page 165)
Instrument Display and on-board computer 199
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band in tachometer 3 (overrevving range) is reached. During normal operating conditions, coolant temperature display 4 may rise to 248 °F (120 °C).
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
200 Instrument Display and on-board computer
# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel
2 Touch Control (on-board computer) 3 Touch Control (multimedia system) 4 Button group:
% Main menu and back button (multime- dia system) ó Voice Control System 6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call
and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. % The on-board computer displays appear in
the multifunction display ( page 201).
1 Button group: % Main menu and back button (on-board computer) 8 Switches sound off/on W Increases the volume X Decreases the volume
Operating the on-board computer
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tions equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
The on-board computer is operated using Touch Control 2 and back button 1 on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The following menus are available: R Service
R DriveAssist R Trip R Navigation R Radio R Media R Phone R HUD The menus can be called up from the menu bar in the multifunction display.
# To call up the menu bar: press the back button on the left.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 201
# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up the menu or confirm the selec- tion: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To scroll through displays or lists in the menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up the submenu or confirm the selection: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To exit the submenu: press the back button on the left.
If you are browsing a submenu and you press and hold the back button on the left, the menu bar appears.
Displays in the multifunction display
1 Outside temperature 2 Drive program 3 Transmission position ( page 141) 4 Time 5 Display section Further displays in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation ( page 143) ë Parking Pilot activated é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated ¯ Cruise control ( page 163)
202 Instrument Display and on-board computer
ç Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( page 171) ( page 165)
a Steering Pilot ( page 171) è ECO start/stop function ë HOLD function ( page 173) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( page 116)
Adjusting the instrument lighting
# Turn brightness control 1 up or down. The lighting of the Instrument Display and in the controls in the vehicle interior is adjus- ted.
Menus and submenus Functions in the Service menu of the onboard computer
On-board computer: , Service # To select the function: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand side of Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. Functions in the Service menu: R Message memory ( page 326) R Tire Pressure: - Checking the tire pressure with the tire
pressure monitoring system ( page 290) - Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system ( page 291) R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date ( page 250)
Calling up the Assistance graphic display On-board computer: , DriveAssist The following displays are available from the Assistance graphic menu: R Assistance graphic R Attention level ( page 191) # To switch between the displays: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch Control.
Status displays in the Assistance graphic: R é: ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated R æ: Active Brake Assist deactivated R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist activated R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist activated
Instrument Display and on-board computer 203
R Gray radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist activated
R Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist activated
R Display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ( page 165)
Calling up displays in the Trip menu On-board computer: , Trip # To select a display: swipe up or down on
the left-hand Touch Control. Displays in the Trip menu: R Standard display R Range and current fuel consumption
A recuperation display is also available for certain engines. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis- play shows a vehicle being refueled instead of the range. R ECO display ( page 139) R Trip computer From Start and From Reset
204 Instrument Display and on-board computer R Digital speedometer
Example: standard display 1 Trip distance 2 Total distance
Example: trip computer 1 Total distance 2 Driving time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption
Resetting values in the Trip menu of the onboard computer On-board computer: , Trip You can reset the values of the following func- tions: R Trip distance
R Trip computer "From start" and "From reset" R ECO display
# To select the function to be reset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. # Select Yes. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand side of Touch Control, the function will be reset immediately.
Calling up navigation instructions in the onboard computer On-board computer: , Navigation
Example: no change of direction announced 1 Distance to the next destination 2 Estimated arrival time 3 Distance to the next change of direction 4 Current road
Example: change of direction announced 1 Road to which the change of direction leads 2 Distance to the change of direction 3 Change-of-direction symbol 4 Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white) 5 Possible lane 6 Lane not recommended (dark gray)
Further possible displays in the Navigation menu: R Direction of Travel: display of direction of
travel and road currently being traveled on.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 205
R New Route... or Calculating Route...: a new route is calculated.
R Road Not Mapped: the road is unknown, e.g. newly built roads.
R No Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination.
R Off Map: the map for the current location is not available.
R Area of Destination Reached: you have reached the area of destination.
R O: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination.
# To exit the menu: press the back button on the left.
206 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Selecting radio stations using the on-board computer On-board computer: , Radio
# To select a radio station: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting the frequency range or station pre- set # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To select the frequency range/station
preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Playing back media using the on-board com- puter On-board computer: , Media
1 Frequency range 2 Station 3 Name of track 4 Name of artist When you select a station in the presets, the preset appears next to the station name. When you select a saved station in the frequency range, an asterisk appears next to the station name.
1 Media source 2 Current track and track number 3 Name of artist 4 Name of album
The folder name also appears in the display. # To change tracks in the active media
source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch Control.
Changing the media source # Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To select a media source: swipe upwards
or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Dialing telephone numbers using the onboard computer Requirements R Mobile phone connected to the multimedia
system On-board computer: , Phone
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tions equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia sys- tem: The most recently dialed telephone num- bers are displayed in the Phone menu. # To select the telephone number: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. If there is only one telephone number saved to an entry: the telephone number is selected. # If there are multiple telephone numbers saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down-
Instrument Display and on-board computer 207
wards on the left-hand Touch Control to select the desired telephone number. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The telephone number is dialed. The following displays may appear instead of the telephone numbers dialed: R Please Wait...: the application is starting. When a Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phone is not established, the menu for authorizing and connecting a mobile phone is displayed in the multimedia system . R Updating data...: the call list is being upda- ted. R Importing Contacts...: the contacts from the mobile phone or from a storage medium are imported.
Accepting/rejecting a call When you receive a call, a message appears in the Head-up Display Incoming Call. # Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select 6 (Accept) or ~ (Reject). # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
208 Instrument Display and on-board computer The call may be accepted/rejected using the 6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the Head-up Display settings in the on-board computer
On-board computer: , HUD The following Head-up Display settings can be adjusted: R Position R Brightness R Display Content
# To select the setting: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. # To adjust the value: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand Touch Control.
1 Currently selected setting 2 Digital speedometer 3 Traffic Sign Assist 4 Navigation displays
Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display The Head-up Display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the cockpit into the driver's field of vision. Display elements
1 Navigation messages 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)
When you receive a call, a message appears in the Head-up Display 6 Incoming Call.
System limitations The visibility is influenced by the following condi- tions: R Seat position R The positioning of the display image R Light conditions R Wet roads R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses
Switching the Head-up Display on/off
# Press button 1.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 209
210 Multimedia system
Overview and operation Overview of the multimedia system
5 Control knob, adjusts the volume and switches the sound on or off
6 Ü button, switches the multimedia sys- tem on or off
7 Touchpad The three central controls are Touch Control 1, controller 4 and touchpad 7.
display may then switch off completely for a while. % If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the display.
Central controls overview
Notes on the display
1 Touch Control 2 Display 3 ß, $, Õ, %, Ø buttons, calls
up main functions 4 Controller
* NOTE Scratching of the display
The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss surface. There is a risk of it becoming scratched. Avoid touching the display. Observe the notes on cleaning.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior ( page 262). Automatic temperature-controlled switchoff feature: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
1 Touch Control 2 Controller 3 Touchpad The list shows operating options and provides operating examples.
Controller R slide 1 left or right
- selects a radio station - calls up a list R slide 4 up or down - highlights a preset in the station - selects a system language R slide 2 diagonally - moves the crosshair across the map R turn 3 - sound: sets the treble, mid-range and
bass - selects a favorite - connects a mobile phone: selects a
mobile phone from the list of detected mobile phones R press 7 - stores radio stations - confirms a selection or entry
Multimedia system 211
Touch Control and touchpad (single-finger swipe) R swipe left or right
- selects a radio station - calls up a list R swipe up or down - highlights a preset in the station - selects a system language R swipe diagonally - moves the crosshair across the map R press - stores radio stations - confirms a selection or entry
Touchpad (two-finger swipe) R turn right or left using two fingers
- tone settings: adjusts the treble, midrange and bass
R move two fingers apart or together - changes the map scale (zoom in or out)
Touch Control Operating Touch Control
# To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left or right on Touch Control 1.
# Press Touch Control 1. # To open a list: press Touch Control 1. # To close a list: press the 2 button.
212 Multimedia system
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
Setting the sensitivity Multimedia system , Vehicle . System Settings # Select Touch Control Sensitivity. # Set the sensitivity.
Operating the controller
# Turn 3 left or right.
# Slide 1 left or right.
# Slide 4 up or down.
# Slide 2 diagonally.
# Press 7 briefly or press and hold. Using the controller, you can: R navigate through menus and lists R save stations or contacts R create favorites R adjust tone settings R enter characters
1 % button, to return to the previous dis- play (press briefly), to call up the basic menu (press and hold)
2 Calls up the touchpad ò button, calls up favorites
3 Controller Controller operating options:
Touchpad
Switching the touchpad on/off Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings # Touchpad without handwriting recogni-
tion: switch Activate Touchpad on O or off ª.
# Touchpad with handwriting recognition: select Touchpad.
# Switch Activate Touchpad on O or off ª.
Operating the touchpad
Prerequisite The touchpad is switched on ( page 212).
1 Touchpad 2 ò button, calls up favorites 3 D button, calls up the audio menu 4 % button, returns to the previous display
(press briefly), calls up the basic menu (press and hold)
Multimedia system 213
You can navigate in menus and lists via touchsensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger swipe. # To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
left or right. # Press the touchpad. # To close and open lists: swipe left or right. # To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction. Use the following functions with a two-finger swipe: # To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up
or down using two fingers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers apart or together. # To increase or reduce the vehicle set-
tings and sound settings: turn two fingers clockwise or counter-clockwise.
214 Multimedia system
Handwriting recognition: switching the readaloud function on/off
Requirement: The touchpad is equipped with handwriting rec- ognition. Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Touchpad # Switch Read Out Handwriting Recognition on
O or off ª.
Handwriting recognition: selecting an input language # Select B. # Select an input language.
Selecting a station and track using the touchpad # Swipe upwards using two fingers on the
touchpad. A control menu shows the current audio source. # Swipe left or right using one finger. Radio: the previous or next station is set.
Media source: the previous or next track is selected. # To hide the control menu: swipe down on the touchpad using two fingers. Main functions Calling up the main functions
# 1 ß button: switches navigation on # 2 $ button: switches the radio on # 3 Õ button: switches the audio source
on
# 4 % button: switches telephone mode on
# 5 Ø button: calls up vehicle functions
Alternatively: # When the basic menu of a main function is
shown, press the % button. # To select a main function: turn and press
the controller. or # Swipe left or right on the touchpad and then
press the touchpad.
Calling up menus on the multimedia system
Calling up a menu # Call up a main function ( page 214). # To show the menu: swipe up or down on
the touchpad. or # Slide the controller up or down.
The marker is shown either in the main func- tion line or menu bar.
Multimedia system 215
# To select a menu item: swipe left or right on the touchpad and then press it.
or # Slide the controller to the left or right and
press it. Main function line (top) is selected: another main function is called up. Menu bar (bottom) is selected: a menu appears.
Calling up an operating mode for a main function # Call up a main function ( page 214). # Select the main function in the main function
line again. # Swipe left or right on the touchpad and press
it. or # Slide the controller to the left or right and
press it. Depending on the main function, a range of operating modes are available.
For media selection, the following media sources can be selected, for example: R Memory Card R Media Interface 1 R Media Interface 2 R Bluetooth Audio R Info on Media # Alternatively for media selection: select Devices in the lower menu bar. # Swipe up or down on the touchpad and press it. or # Slide the controller up or down and press it. The media source is selected. Playback starts.
Favorites
Overview of favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favorites in total.
The following functions are available: R add pre-defined favorites from the follow-
ing categories: - Navigation - Entertainment - Tel/® - Vehicle - Climate Control R add your own favorites R rename a favorite R move a favorite R delete a favorite
Calling up favorites # Press the ò button.
The favorites are displayed. # Swipe left or right on the touchpad and press
it. or # Turn and press the controller.
216 Multimedia system
Leaving the Favorites menu # Press the ò button again.
Adding a favorite
Adding a pre-defined favorite # Press the ò button.
The favorites are displayed. # Swipe down on the touchpad or slide the
controller down. The Favorites menu appears. # Select Reassign. The categories are displayed. # Select a category. The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite. # Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.
Example: adding your own favorite # Select Vehicle. # Select Full Screen: 'Consumption'.
# Press and hold the ò button until the favorites are displayed.
# Add a favorite at the desired position.
Renaming a favorite # Press the ò button.
The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite. # Swipe down on the touchpad or slide the
controller down. The Favorites menu appears. # Select Rename. # Enter characters. # Confirm the entry.
Moving a favorite # Press the ò button.
The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite. # Swipe down on the touchpad or slide the
controller down. The Favorites menu appears. # Select Move.
# To create a favorite at a desired position: swipe left or right on the touchpad and press it.
or # Turn and press the controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.
Deleting a favorite # Press the ò button.
The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite. # Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears. # Select Delete. # Select Yes.
Multimedia system 217
Switching the sound on/off
# To switch off: press control knob 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted.
# To switch on: change the media source or adjust the volume.
Entering characters
Using the character input function
On Touch Control # Select a character in the character bar.
Depending on the target entry, either a full set of characters is available or, alternatively, only those characters that are available on the basis of the characters that have already been entered.
On the controller # Select a character in the character bar.
Depending on the target entry, either a full set of characters is available or, alternatively, only those characters that are available on the basis of the characters that have already been entered.
On the touchpad # Write the characters on the touch-sensitive
surface of the touchpad. Handwriting recognition supports you by means of character suggestions and a readaloud function.
Switching between central operating con- trols # To activate Touch Control: press Touch
Control. # To activate the controller: press the con-
troller. # To activate the touchpad: press the touch-
pad. Characters can be entered using the following methods: R using a keyword search for a track or artist R connecting the mobile phone to the multime-
dia system by entering the passkey R entering a phone number R entering a web address
Entering characters using the controller
Entering characters # Turn 3, slide 1 or 4 and press
the controller. Use the following editing functions: R * or E
218 Multimedia system
Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters RÄ
Switches to special characters and symbols RB
Changes the language R 45
Selects the input line R 23
Moves the cursor within the input line RF
Deletes a character or an entry R&
Cancels character entry
Deleting a character or an entry # To delete a character: when F is highligh-
ted, press the controller. # To delete an entry: when F is highlighted,
press and hold the controller until the entry has been deleted.
Confirms an entry # Select ¡.
Entering characters on the touchpad
Enter characters # Use one finger to write characters on the sur-
face. The character is entered in the input line. If different interpretations are possible, charac- ter suggestions are displayed.
Selecting a character suggestion # Turn the controller. # Press the touchpad. # Resume character input. The following editing functions can be used: RB
Changes the language Rp
Selects the input line Moves the cursor within the input line R&
Cancels character entry. Selecting the input line # Select p. # Swipe up or down. Moving the cursor within the input line # Select p. # Swipe to the left or right. Deleting characters # When an input line is selected, swipe left. Confirms an entry # Press the touchpad.
System settings Display Configuring display settings Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Display
Display design # Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic.
Display brightness # Select Brightness. # Select a brightness value. Switching off the display Multimedia system: , Vehicle # Select Display Off.
The display is switched off.
Time and date Setting the time and date automatically This function is only available in vehicles with GPS reception. Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Time # Activate O or deactivate ª Automatic
Time Settings. Setting the time zone Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Time . Time Zone: A list of countries is displayed.
# Select a country #. Depending on the country, time zones are displayed.
# Set the time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time Zone:.
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer) The Daylight Saving Time and Daylight Saving Time Setting options cannot be selected in all countries. Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Time
Vehicles with GPS # Select Daylight Saving Time. # Select On, Off or Automatic. R Automatic: the automatic changeover to
summer time is not available for all time zones. R Off: standard time is set.
Multimedia system 219
Vehicles without GPS # Activate O or deactivate ª Current Time:
Daylight Saving Time. # Summer time changeover: select Daylight
Saving Time Setting. # Select Automatic, Daylight Saving Time or
Standard Time. The current setting is marked with #. The local time is set one hour forward or back. R Automatic: the automatic changeover to
Daylight Saving Time is not available for all time zones.
Setting the time and date format Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Time . Format # Set the date and time format #.
220 Multimedia system
Setting the time and date manually Multimedia system: , Vehicle . Time
Vehicles with GPS It may be useful to set the time manually in the following situations: R a country is not contained in the list of time
zones R a time differing from the local time is set
# Select Set Time Manually. # Set the hours. # Navigate to the right to set the minutes. # Set the minutes.
The Automatic Time Settings function is deactivated ª. % The time can be set back by 12 hours and forward by 14 hours.
Vehicles without GPS # Select Set Time or Set Date. # Set the time or date.
The various time and date settings must be set correctly to enable a reliable Internet connection to be established.
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® settings Bluetooth® technology is a standard for shortrange wireless data transfer up to approximately 32.8 ft (10 m). You can use Bluetooth® to con- nect your mobile phone to the multimedia sys- tem and use the following functions, for exam- ple: R Hands-free system with access to the follow-
ing options: - Phone book ( page 227) - Call lists ( page 229) - Messages ( page 230) R Internet connection R Listening to music via Bluetooth® audio ( page 241) R Transferring business cards (vCards) into the vehicle
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. % Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not
available in all countries. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Activate Bluetooth # Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth®.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Automatic Volume Adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources. # Switch the function on O or off ª.
Multimedia system 221
System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan- guages. If a language is not available, the naviga- tion announcements will be in English. Setting the system language Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Language # Set the language.
Setting the distance unit and temperature unit Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Units Distance # Select Units.
# Select km or mi. # Switch Additional Speedometer on O to dis-
play in the instrument cluster's multifunction display.
Temperature # Select Temperature Display. # Select Outside or Cooling.
Data import and export Data import/export function The following functions are possible: R transferring data from one system or vehicle
to another system or vehicle. R creating a backup copy of your personal data
and loading it again. R protecting your personal data against unwan-
ted export with PIN protection.
You can either use an SD card or a USB storage device as temporary storage.
% Please note that the NTFS file system is not supported. The FAT32 file system is recom- mended.
Importing/exporting data
* NOTE Data loss # Do not remove the data storage
medium when data is being exported. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Requirements R The vehicle is stationary. R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has
been started. R The SD card is inserted ( page 238). Multimedia system , Vehicle . System Settings . Data Import/Export # Select Import Data or Export Data.
222 Multimedia system
Importing # Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to overwrite the current data. The existing data in the multimedia system is overwritten, e.g. address data. A message appears. The multimedia system is restarted once the data has been imported.
Exporting If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques- ted. # Enter your four-digit PIN. # Select a data storage medium.
The data is exported. The data export may take several minutes.
Activating/deactivating PIN protection for data export Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Data Import/Export
# To activate: activate Activate PIN Protection O.
# Enter your four-digit PIN. # Enter your four-digit PIN again.
PIN protection is activated when both PINs match. # To deactivate: deactivate Activate PIN Protection ª. # Enter your four-digit PIN. % If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your PIN protection for you. Alternatively: you can deactivate PIN protec- tion by resetting your personal data ( page 222).
Reset function
Multimedia system: , Vehicle . System Settings . Reset The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones
# Select Yes. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to reset. No selected: the process is canceled.
# Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to factory settings and restarted.
Garmin® MAP PILOT navigation module Overview of Garmin® MAP PILOT navigation module
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury caused by swallowing SD memory cards
SD memory cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. # Keep SD memory cards out of the reach
of children. # Seek medical attention immediately if a
SD memory card has been swallowed.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tions equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Multimedia system 223
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
During operation of the Garmin® MAP PILOT, always observe the following: R The legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving. R Road and traffic rules and regulations always
have priority over Garmin® MAP PILOT driv- ing recommendations.
Observe the following notes on the operating instructions and updates: R The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instruc-
tions are stored on the SD memory card as a PDF file. R The SD card box contains a printed quick guide.
R You can obtain digital map and software updates from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For some countries, digital map and software updates are available in the form of a down- load or an SD memory card. For downloads, visit http://shop.mercedesbenz.com and follow the information in the Garmin® MAP PILOT section. Further information (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Switching the Garmin® MAP PILOT naviga- tion module on
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera- tures
High temperatures can damage the SD mem- ory card. # Remove the SD memory card after use
and take it out of the vehicle.
224 Multimedia system
Multimedia system: , Navi # Alternatively: press the ß button. # Inserting the SD memory card ( page 238).
Telephone Telephony Telephone menu overview
4 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone
5 Telephone menu character bar 6 Enters characters using the touchpad 7 Displays the phone book
Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a mobile phone has been connected to the multi- media system. The symbols depend on your mobile phone and your mobile phone network provider. The Bluetooth® interface is available to you for telephony. The mobile phone is connected directly via the multimedia system. If the mobile phone connected supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile), the 1 menu item is available.
1 Mobile phone network provider 2 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 3 ¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active)
Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper- ating integrated communication equip- ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper- ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate mobile communication equip- ment when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Only operate this equipment when the vehi- cle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Telephony is possible via:
R The Bluetooth® interface
Bluetooth® profile overview Bluetooth® profile Function of the mobile phone
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
Contacts are auto- matically displayed in the multimedia sys- tem
MAP (Message Access Profile)
Message functions can be used
Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Multimedia system 225
HD Voice® R To improve voice quality, the multimedia sys-
tem supports telephone calls in HD Voice®. R In order to use this function, the mobile
phones and the mobile phone network pro- vider of the person you are calling must sup- port HD Voice®.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R There is insufficient network coverage in the
area R You move from one GSM or UMTS transmit-
ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no communication channels are free R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
Disconnecting a mobile phone (de-authoriz- ing) Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Connect Device # Highlight the mobile phone in the device list. # Select G. # Select Deauthorize. # Select Yes.
Switching mobile phones
Prerequisite The mobile phones are authorized . Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Connect Device # Select the mobile phone from the device list. % Only one mobile phone can be connected at
any one time. The mobile phone that is cur- rently connected is indicated with a point #.
226 Multimedia system
Setting the reception and transmission vol- ume
Requirement A mobile phone is connected (authorized) . Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Connect Device This function ensures optimal voice quality. # Highlight the mobile phone in the device list. # Select G. # Select Reception Volume or Transmission
Volume. # Set the volume.
Further information on the recommended recep- tion and transmission volume: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Calls
Using the telephone Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone
Making a call # Select numbers. # Select w.
The call is made.
Accepting a call # Select w Accept.
Rejecting a call # Select = Reject.
Ending a call # Select =.
Activating functions during a call
1 Adds a call 2 Microphone status display 3 Ends the call 4 Character bar # To add a call: select ^. # Make the call. # To switch the microphone on/off: navigate
downwards. The menu bar is shown. # Select Microphone On or Microphone Off. # To end the call: select =.
Multimedia system 227
# To send DTMF tones: enter characters using the character bar.
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements R the mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system . R at least one call is added ( page 226).
Switching between calls # Select ^ (1) or ^ (2).
The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.
Activating or ending a call on hold # Select w Resume or = End Call.
Conducting a conference call # Select Conference in the telephone menu.
The new participant is included in the confer- ence call.
Ending an active call # Select =.
% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Incoming call during an existing call (call waiting)
Prerequisite There is an active call ( page 226). If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. An acoustic signal also sounds. # Select w Accept.
The incoming call is active. The previous call is on hold. # Select = Reject. % This function and behavior depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper- ating instructions).
Phone book
Overview of the phone book The phone book of the mobile phone is automat- ically displayed in the multimedia system after the connection is established. R 2,000 entries are reserved for permanently
saved contacts in the multimedia system. R 2,000 entries are reserved for contacts loa-
ded from the mobile phone.
In the telephone book, you can carry out the fol- lowing actions: R searching for contacts ( page 228). R storing contacts ( page 228). R deleting contacts ( page 229).
228 Multimedia system
Symbol overview Symbol
Explanation
f
Contact stored in the multimedia system.
ó
Contact that was called up from a mobile phone
ò
Contact imported from a memory card or a USB device.
ñ
Contact imported via the Bluetooth® inter- face.
Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Options . Import Contacts Automatically
Automatic # Allow automatic download O.
Manual # Deactivate automatic download ª. # Select Import Contacts.
Searching for a contact in the phone book Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Phone Book # Select characters. # Select ¬.
The contact is displayed.
Changing the display and the sorting criteria for contacts Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Options . Display and Sorting The following functions are available: R Last Name, First Name R Last Name First Name R First Name Last Name
# Select an option.
Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Phone Book # Search for a contact on the mobile phone
( page 228). # Select G. # Select Save.
The contact is identified by the f symbol in the phone book.
Importing contacts into the telephone book Via Options, you can import contacts into the telephone book as electronic business cards using a memory card, USB or Bluetooth®.
Source ò Memory card ò USB device
ñ Bluetooth® con- nection
Requirements
The SD memory card is inserted. The USB device is inserted into the USB port. If the sending of vCards is supported via Bluetooth®, vCards can be received on mobile phones or netbooks, for example. Bluetooth® is activa- ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device (see the manufactur- er's operating instruc- tions).
Multimedia system 229
Deleting a contact from the phone book Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Phone Book You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle. # Switch off automatic download of mobile
phone contacts ( page 228). # Highlight the contact in the phone book. # Select G. # Select Delete Contact. # Select Yes.
Call lists
Overview of the call lists If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue- tooth® profile, the call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system. When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile (see manufacturer's Opera- tor's Manual). If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the multimedia system gener-
ates its own call lists. These are not the same as the call lists in your mobile phone. If the contact for an incoming call is not yet saved in the multimedia system, you can use the call list to save the telephone number.
Making a call from call lists Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Call Lists # Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed. # Select an entry. # Make the call.
Displaying details from a list entry Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Call Lists # Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed.
The list is displayed. # Highlight the entry. # Select G. # Select Details.
230 Multimedia system
Speed dial list Calling up the speed dial list Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Call Lists # Select Speed Dial Preset List.
Setting up a speed dial list Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Phone Book # Select the contact. # Select G. # Select Assign Speed Dial Preset. # Select a preset for the speed dial.
Deleting speed dial presets Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . Call Lists . Speed Dial Preset List
Deleting a speed dial preset # Highlight the preset you want to delete. # Select G. # Select Delete Speed Dial Preset.
# Select Yes. Deleting all speed dial presets # Highlight a preset. # Select G. # Select Delete All Speed Dial Presets. # Select Yes.
Messages (text messages and e-mails) Notes on messages If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® MAP profile, the message function can be used on the multimedia system. With some mobile phones, some settings still have to be made after connecting to the multimedia sys- tem (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). New messages are identified by the 1 symbol in the multimedia system display and an audible signal. The ú symbol is displayed when the mobile phone's message memory is full.
Text messages cannot be written while the vehi- cle is in motion. You can obtain further information about set- tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®capable mobile phones from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Text message settings Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . 1 . Settings
Configuring an e-mail account # Select an e-mail account.
The e-mail account is now configured.
Configuring the text messages or e-mails dis- played # Highlight Text Msg. or an e-mail account. # Select G.
A menu with the following options is shown: R All Messages R New Messages
R Off (The messages are not displayed automatically.)
Reading messages Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . 1
In the message menu Unread messages are displayed. # Select a message.
The message text is displayed.
In the message folder The message menu is displayed. # Select 1 Text Msg or 1 Email. # Select a message.
The message text is displayed.
Making a call from the messages menu Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Phone . 1
Calling a text message sender # Highlight the text message. # Select G.
# Select Call Sender. Calling phone numbers from a message # Call up a text message or e-mail. # Select a phone number within the message. # Select Call Number.
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA only) Making a call via the overhead control panel Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is only available in the USA.
Multimedia system 231
1 Roadside Assistance call 2 SOS button cover 3 MB Info call 4 SOS button # To make a Roadside Assistance call: Press
button 1. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
232 Multimedia system
# To make an emergency call: Press SOS button cover 2 briefly to open.
# Press and hold SOS button 4 for at least one second. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
# To make an MB Info call: Press button 3. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
An emergency call can be initiated even if a Roadside Assistance or MB Info call is active. This has priority over all other active calls. Calls via the overhead control panel are only possible with an available mobile phone net- work. Further information on Mercedes-Benz mbrace® and other services can be found at: http:// www.mbusa.com
Information on the emergency call system
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury despite pressing the SOS button
Even if you press the SOS button in an emer- gency, remaining in the vehicle may be dan- gerous for the following reasons: R you see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an acci- dent R the vehicle is on a dangerous section of road R the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions
# Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
# Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants.
# In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e.g. with a warning triangle.
Automatic emergency call The emergency call is initiated: R When an airbag is deployed. R When the Emergency Tensioning Devices are
triggered.
You can end an automatically initiated emer- gency call yourself after 60 seconds.
Manual emergency call An emergency call can be initiated manually via the SOS button in the overhead control panel ( page 231). If you leave the vehicle immediately after press- ing the SOS button, you do not know if Mercedes-Benz mbrace® has successfully made the emergency call.
Initiated emergency call A voice connection between the Customer Assis- tance Center and the vehicle occupants is estab- lished: R if the vehicle occupants are responsive, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Multimedia system 233
asks for more detailed information on the emergency. R if no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu- lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Transferred data During the voice connection to the Customer Assistance Center, the following data is transfer- red: R Current vehicle location R Vehicle identification number
Emergency call not possible R if the mobile phone network is unavailable,
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is not able to make an emergency call. A message to this effect is shown in the mul- tifunction display. The indicator lamp flashes continuously. In this case, seek assistance by other means.
Information on the MB Info call An Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center has been initiated via the overhead control panel ( page 231).
You can find information on the following topics: R Activating Mercedes-Benz mbrace® R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from
Mercedes-Benz
Data is transmitted during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center ( page 233).
Information on the Roadside Assistance call A Roadside Assistance call to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center has been initi- ated via the overhead control panel: R The problem with the vehicle is analyzed
using remote diagnosis. Further information about this can be obtained at: http://www.mbusa.com R A qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for these services.
Data is transmitted during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center ( page 233).
Transferred data during a service call In certain countries you must confirm the data transfer. Data transferred includes the following:
Overview of transferred data
Service call
Transmitted data
MB Info call Roadside Assistance call
R current vehicle location
R vehicle identifica- tion number
R service code R selected data
about the status of the vehicle
234 Multimedia system
Online and Internet functions Internet connection
Setting up an Internet connection
Requirements R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth® . To do so, the mobile phone must support one of the following Bluetooth® profiles: - DUN (Dial-Up Networking) - PAN (Personal Area Network) R Set the access data of the mobile phone net- work provider for the connected mobile phone in the multimedia system. If you use incorrect access data, additional costs may be incurred. R If you use the telephone module for Internet functions, you require a SIM card in the tele- phone module or a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone.
You can obtain more detailed information at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . Settings . Configure Internet Settings . Search for Internet Devices . Start Search # Select the mobile phone.
If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PAN profile, Internet access is set up. You can use the Internet functions. If the mobile phone does not support the named Blue- tooth® profile, predefined or manual access data must be set.
Selecting the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider # Select Predefined Settings.
A list of countries appears. # Select the country of your mobile phone net-
work provider. The list of available providers appears.
# Select your mobile phone network provider. An overview of the provider settings appears.
# Select Confirm Settings.
Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider # Select Manual Settings.
An overview of the provider settings appears. # Set access data. # Select Confirm Settings. % Set the access data in accordance with your
data package. You can contact your mobile phone network provider to obtain the precise access data.
Canceling Internet access permission for a mobile phone Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . Settings . Configure Internet Settings # Highlight a mobile phone. # Select G. # Select Delete Configuration.
# Select Yes.
Displaying mobile phone details Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . Settings . Configure Internet Settings # Highlight a mobile phone. # Select G. # Select Details.
Establishing an Internet connection
Requirements R Your connection device is activated and
operational. R Your connection device receives a signal and
has a data connection.
Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet # For example, call up the Mercedes-Benz
mobile website. # To show the menu: press the % button. # To end the connection: select ©.
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirements R Register to use Mercedes-Benz Apps. R Confirm the general terms and conditions.
Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . Mercedes-Benz Apps # Select the App.
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps and information can be obtained at: http://apps.mercedesbenz.com/apps/ % The available features are country-depend-
ent. License fees may be applicable.
Multimedia system 235 Web browser Calling up a website Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . www # Enter a web address. # To finish entry and call up a website:
select ¬. % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle
is in motion. Overview of the web browser
1 Closes the browser 2 Web page, back
236 Multimedia system
3 Web page, forwards 4 Refreshes/stops 5 URL entry 6 Favorites 7 Disconnects 8 Options
Calling up the web browser options Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . www # Call up the website. # To show the menu: press the % button. # To call up the options menu: select Ü.
The following functions are available: R Add to Bookmarks R Current URL R Zoom R Jump From Link To Link R Directional Scrolling R Settings
# Select an option.
Calling up the web browser settings Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . www # Call up the website. # To show the menu: press the % button. # To call up the options menu: select Ü. # Select Settings.
The following functions are available: R Download Images Automatically R Block Pop-Ups R Activate Javascript R Allow Cookies R Show Link Target R Character Size R Character Code
# Select the setting.
Deleting Internet history Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . Settings . Delete Private Data # Select the setting. or # Select Delete All Data On Exit.
Setting Internet favorites Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet
Creating favorites # Select www. # Call up the website. # To show the menu: press the % button. # To call up the options menu: select Ü. # Select Add to Bookmarks.
Selecting favorites # Select Internet Favorites. # Select bookmarks.
Editing favorites # Select Edit. # Enter a web address
Deleting favorites # Select Delete. # Select Yes.
Closing the browser Multimedia system: , Tel/® . Tel/® . Internet . www # To show the menu: press the % button. # Select %.
Media Audio mode
Information on audio mode
& WARNING Risk of distraction when han- dling data storage medium
If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
Permissible file systems: R FAT32 R exFAT R NTFS
Permissible data storage medium: R SD memory card R USB storage device
Multimedia system 237
% The multimedia system supports up to a total of 15,000 files.
Supported formats: R MP3 R WMA R AAC formats
% Due to the large variety of available music files regarding encoders, sampling rates and bit rates, playback cannot always be guaran- teed.
% Due to the wide range of USB devices availa- ble on the market, playback cannot be guar- anteed for all brands of USB devices.
% Copy-protected music files or DRM encryp- ted files cannot be played back.
% MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).
Notes on copyright Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without
238 Multimedia system
the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copy- right regulations and that you comply with these.
Activating media mode Multimedia system: , Media . Media The following functions are available: R Memory Card R Media Interface 1 R Media Interface 2 R Bluetooth Audio
# Select the media source. Playable music files are played back.
Inserting/removing an SD memory card
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal- lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts. They could be swallowed and lead to chok- ing.
# Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil- dren.
# Seek medical attention immediately if an SD card has been swallowed.
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera- tures
High temperatures can damage the SD mem- ory card. # Remove the SD memory card after use
and take it out of the vehicle.
Multimedia system: , Media . Media . Memory Card Inserting The multimedia connection unit is located in the stowage compartment under the armrest. # Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con- tacts must face downwards. Playable music files are played back.
Removing # Press the SD memory card. # Eject the SD memory card. Overview of the audio mode
1 Active data storage medium 2 Play mode 3 Track 4 Track number and number of tracks in the
track list 5 Artist and album 6 Time with elapsed time/time remaining bar 7 Cover
Connecting USB devices
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera- tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices. # Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of the vehicle.
The multimedia connection unit is found in the stowage compartment under the armrest and has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, additional USB ports may be found in the stowage compartment of the center con- sole or the rear folding compartment. # Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable music files are played back only if the corresponding media display is activated. Selecting a track Multimedia system: , Media . Media # Select the media source. Playable music files are played back.
Selecting a track using the current track list # To display the current track list: press the
touchpad and controller. # Select a track.
Selecting a track by skipping to a track # To skip back or forward to a track: navi-
gate to the left or right.
Selecting playback options Multimedia system: , Media . Options
Play mode # Select Playback Mode. # Select Normal Track Sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it appears on the data storage medium. # Select Random Track List. The current track list is played in random order. # Select Random Medium. All tracks on the data storage medium are played in random order.
Multimedia system 239
Skip to time # Select Skip to Time.
A menu appears. # Set the time. Showing track information # Switch Show Track Information on O or off
ª. Pause and playback function Multimedia system: , Media
Pausing playback # Navigate downwards. # Select Ë. Continuing playback # Select Ì.
240 Multimedia system
Media search
Starting the media search Multimedia system: , Media . Search Depending on the connected media sources and files, the following categories are listed: R Current Track List R Folder R Keyword Search R Playlists R Artists R Albums R Tracks R Genres R Year R Composers R iTunes U (Apple® devices) R Genius Mixes (Apple® devices) R Podcasts (Apple® devices) R Audiobooks (Apple® devices)
# Select a category.
Media Interface Information about the Media Interface Media Interface is a universal interface for the connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul- timedia system has two USB ports. The USB ports are located in the stowage compartment under the armrest. Supported devices The Media Interface allows you to connect the following data storage media: R iPod® R iPhone® R MP3 player R USB devices For details and a list of supported devices, visit our website at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section.
Switching on Media Interface Multimedia system: , Media . Media . Media Interface 1 # Connect the data storage medium with the
USB port ( page 239). Playable music files are played back. Overview of Media Interface
1 Active data storage medium 2 Play mode 3 Track 4 Track number and number of tracks in the
track list 5 Artist and album
6 Time with elapsed time/time remaining bar 7 Cover Bluetooth® audio Information about Bluetooth® audio Before using your Bluetooth® audio equipment with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to authorize it ( page 241). Bluetooth® Audio overview
1 Active data storage medium 2 Play mode 3 Track display
Multimedia system 241
4 Connected Bluetooth® audio equipment 5 Time with elapsed time/time remaining bar 6 Artist and album
Searching for and authorizing the Bluetooth® audio equipment
Requirements Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys- tem ( page 220). Check your Bluetooth® audio equipment for the following (see the manufacturer's operating instructions): R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must sup-
port the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles. R the Bluetooth® function must be activated. R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must be "visible" for other devices. R the Bluetooth® audio equipment must sup- port Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing.
Multimedia system: , Media . Media . Bluetooth Audio . Options . Bluetooth Audio Devices . Search for Audio Devices # Select Start Search.
The multimedia system searches for Blue- tooth® audio equipment within range and adds them to the Bluetooth® device list.
Option 1: Secure Simple Pairing # Select Bluetooth® audio equipment.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia sys- tem and on the mobile phone. # Confirm on both devices if the codes are identical.
Option 2: entering the passkey # Select Bluetooth® audio equipment.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed. # Multimedia system: choose a one to six-
teen-digit number combination as a passkey.
242 Multimedia system
# Select OK once all the numbers have been entered.
# Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and confirm your entry. After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth® audio equipment is connected and starts playing.
Establishing a connection from the Blue- tooth® audio equipment The Bluetooth® device name of the multimedia system is MB BLUETOOTH. # Select Connect via Audio Device. # Start the authorization on your Bluetooth®
audio equipment (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth® audio equipment is connected and starts playing.
With some Bluetooth® audio equipment, play- back must be initially started on the device itself so that the multimedia system can play the audio files.
% Device-specific information on authorizing and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones can be obtained at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Activating Bluetooth® Audio Multimedia system: , Media . Media # Select Bluetooth Audio.
The multimedia system activates the connec- ted Bluetooth® audio equipment.
Adjusting the volume on the Bluetooth® audio equipment Multimedia system: , Media . Media . Bluetooth Audio . Options . Volume # Select Standard or Boost. % On some Bluetooth® audio equipment, the
volume can be adjusted on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Displaying Bluetooth® audio equipment details Multimedia system: , Media . Media . Bluetooth Audio . Options . Bluetooth Audio Devices # Highlight Bluetooth® audio equipment and
navigate to the right. # Select Details.
De-authorizing (de-registering) Bluetooth® audio equipment Multimedia system: , Media . Media . Bluetooth Audio . Options . Bluetooth Audio Devices # Highlight Bluetooth® audio equipment and
navigate to the right. # Select Deauthorize. # Select Yes.
The device will be deleted from the Blue- tooth® device list.
Radio Switching on the radio Multimedia system: , Radio # Alternatively: press the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected. Radio overview
1 Preset 2 Display of radio station selected
Multimedia system 243
3 Main display field with available stations and relevant information
4 Artist and track display Switching HD radio on/off Multimedia system: , Radio . Options . HD Radio
# Activate O or deactivate ª the function. % HD RadioTM and the HD, HD radio, and "Arc"
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Setting the frequency band Multimedia system: , Radio . Band HD Radio FM and HD Radio AM can be selected. # Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station Multimedia system: , Radio
Using the main display field # To select a station: navigate to the left or
right. Using the current station list # Press the touchpad or the controller.
The station list appears with the stations cur- rently available. # Select a channel. Using direct entry # Select Options. # Select Direct Entry.
244 Multimedia system
# Select a frequency band. # Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field. or # Select Station Preset. # Enter the station preset of the desired sta-
tion. # Select ¬.
Using the preset position # Select Preset. # Select Enter Preset. # Enter the station preset of the desired sta-
tion. # Select ¬.
Using the search function # Select è. # Enter a search term. # Select ¬.
Results are displayed. # Select a channel.
Calling up the radio station list
Multimedia system: , Radio # Press the touchpad or the controller.
The station list appears. % Each frequency range has its own station list
with the stations that can currently be received.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system: , Radio # Select Preset. # Select Save Current Station/Channel. # Select a location for storing the station. or # In radio mode, press and hold the touchpad
or controller until the preset list appears. # Select a location for storing the station.
Editing radio station presets Multimedia system: , Radio . Preset . Edit Station Preset
Deleting stations # Highlight the preset entry and navigate to the
right. # Select Delete Highlighted Station/Channel. # Select Yes. Moving stations # Highlight the preset entry and navigate to the
right. # Select Move Highlighted Station/Channel. # Select a location for storing the channel.
Activating/deactivating the presets view Multimedia system: , Radio . Preset # Select Station Preset View: On.
The radio station preset appears.
# To switch between stored stations: navi- gate to the left or right.
or # Select Station Preset View: Off.
The frequency band of the station currently being played appears.
Displaying the artist and track
Multimedia system: , Radio . Options # Select Show Station Information. # Switch the function on O.
Tagging music tracks
Multimedia system: , Radio . Options If radio stations provide the relevant information, this function allows you to transfer information on the music track currently playing to an Apple® device. You can then purchase the audio file from the iTunes Store®. # Select Tag This Track.
The track information is saved.
Displaying station information Requirement R Radio stations provide the relevant informa-
tion. Multimedia system: , Radio
Multimedia system 245
# Select Information. Additional information is displayed.
Returning to the main display # Select Information.
Satellite radio Information on the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® Satellite Radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter- tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail- able for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® service cen- ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with SIRIUS XM® Satellite Radio pre-installed at the factory. This service is free for a six-month trial period. About a month before the trial period ends, information will be provided on how to extend this subscrip-
246 Multimedia system
tion. A message is shown, describing how the subscription can be extended. % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. Restrictions on the satellite radio Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail- able or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These include environmental or topographical conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Thus operation at certain locations may not be possible. Registering satellite radio Requirements: The satellite radio mode requires satellite radio equipment and registration with a satellite radio provider. If registration is not included when pur- chasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.
Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio . Options # Select Service.
The service information screen appears and displays the service telephone number and electronic serial number (ESN). # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. If activation is completed success- fully, the Updating Channels... message appears, followed by the satellite radio main menu. % You can also have the satellite service acti- vated online. To do so, please visit http:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Switching to satellite radio Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio # Select Sat Radio.
Overview of the satellite radio
1 Preset 2 Channel name and channel number 3 Main display field with available channels
and relevant information 4 Artist and track Selecting a satellite radio category Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio # Select Category.
The category list appears. # Select a category.
Selecting a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio
Using the main display field # To select a channel: navigate to the left or
right. or # Press the controller.
By entering channel numbers directly # Select Options. # Select Direct Entry. # Select a channel number.
Using the satellite radio channel list # Select Options. # Select Curr. Station List with Artist & Title. # Select a channel.
Using the search function # Select Options. # Select è.
# Enter a search term. # Select ¬.
Results are displayed. # Select a channel.
Storing a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio # Set the channel. # Press and hold the touchpad or controller
until the preset list appears. # Select a location for storing the channel.
Music and sport alerts function This function makes it possible to store a pro- gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. If a match is found with a stored alert, you will be informed.
Multimedia system 247
Setting music and sport alerts
Prerequisites Activate the following functions: R O Activate Music Alerts R O Activate Sports Alerts
Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio . Options . Alert for Artist, Track & Sports Event
Setting a music alert # Select Manage Music Alerts. # Select Select New Alerts. # Select Artist or Track.
The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the channel.
Setting a sport alert # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Select New Alerts. # Select a team from a league.
248 Multimedia system
Managing music and sport alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts.
Displaying satellite radio service information Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio . Options # Select Service.
The telephone number of the provider and the Sirius XM® ESN of your satellite receiver appear.
Displaying satellite radio channel informa- tion Multimedia system: , Radio . Radio . Sat Radio
# Select Info. Additional information is displayed.
Returning to the main display # Select Info.
Sound Tone settings
Information about the sound system The sound system has a total output of 100 watts and is equipped with seven speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system: , Media . à The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance/Fader
# Select the sound menu.
Adjusting treble, mid and bass Multimedia system: , Media . à . Equalizer # Select the rotary menu. # Change the settings. # To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the balance/fader Multimedia system: , Media . à . Balance/Fader # Adjust the balance and fader. # To exit the menu: press the % button.
Burmester® surround sound system
Information about the Burmester® surround sound system The Burmester® surround sound system has a total output of 590 watts and is equipped with 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: , Media . à The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance/Fader R Surround
# Select the sound menu.
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: , Media . à . Equalizer # Select the rotary menu. # Change the settings. # To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: , Media . à . Balance/Fader # Adjust the balance and fader. # To exit the menu: press the % button.
Switching surround sound on/off in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: , Media . à . Surround # Switch the function on/off in the left rotary
menu.
Multimedia system 249
# To exit the menu: press the % button. Adjusting the sound optimization in the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: , Media . à . Surround # Adjust the focus in the right rotary menu. # To exit the menu: press the % button.
250 Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display in the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service message using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain further information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying the service due date On-board computer: , Service . ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: Press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Make sure to observe the following further rela- ted subject: R Operating the on-board computer
( page 200).
Carrying out service work at regular inter- vals
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Always observe the prescribed service
intervals. # Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor- mal operation of the vehicle. Service work will
need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: R Regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops. R If the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances. R For frequent operation in mountainous ter-
rain or on poor road surfaces. R If the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods. R In particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-
recirculation mode is frequently used.
In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the interior air filter, engine air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions. Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed in
the instrument display before disconnecting the battery ( page 250).
Engine compartment Active hood (pedestrian protection) Operation of the active hood (pedestrian pro- tection) In certain accident situations, the risk of injury to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation of the active hood. The rear area of the engine hood is raised by approximately 85 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig- gered active hood yourself. If the active hood has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate the full functionality of the active hood.
The active hood is not available in all countries. Resetting the active hood
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described as follows.
Maintenance and care 251
# With your hand flat, push down active hood 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). The engine hood must engage in position.
# If the active hood can be raised slightly at the rear passenger compartment in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly in position.
Opening/closing the hood
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. # Never unlatch the engine hood while
driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the
engine hood is latched.
252 Maintenance and care
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the engine hood
When opening or closing the engine hood, it may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine hood's range of movement. # Only open or close the engine hood
when there are no persons in the engine hood's range of movement.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Certain components in the engine compart- ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never touch the danger zone surround-
ing moving component parts, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewelry and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch component parts which are under voltage, you could receive an electric shock. # Never touch component parts of the
ignition system or the fuel injection sys- tem when the ignition is switched on.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described as follows.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
Maintenance and care 253
# To open: pull lever 1 to release the hood.
# Push hood catch 1 upwards and lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm).
# To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.
254 Maintenance and care
Engine oil Checking the engine oil level using the oil dipstick
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described as follows.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in different locations. Waiting time before checking the oil level: R Engine at normal operating temperature: five
minutes. R Engine not at normal operating temperature
(e.g. the engine was only started briefly): 30 minutes.
# Park the vehicle on a flat surface. # Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe off. # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again after approximately three seconds. R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2
and 3. R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or
below.
R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2. # If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of
engine oil. # If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Topping up engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described as follows.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart- ment, it may ignite.
# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.
# Allow the engine to cool off and thor- oughly clean the engine oil from compo- nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi- cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil
Topping up too much engine oil can cause damage to the engine or the catalytic con- verter. # Have excess engine oil siphoned off at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Maintenance and care 255
# Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
# Add engine oil. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go. # Check the oil level again ( page 254).
Checking coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described as follows.
& WARNING Danger of burns from hot coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. If you
256 Maintenance and care
open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap. # When opening the cap, wear gloves and
protective eyewear. # Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow
pressure to escape.
# Park the vehicle on a flat surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 °F (70 °C). # Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to relieve overpressure. # Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct: R If the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2 R If the engine is warm, up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm)
over marker bar 2
# If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
R Further information on coolant ( page 322)
Refilling the windshield washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Let the engine cool down and only
touch the component parts described as follows.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the engine hood
If you open the engine hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the engine hood, allow
the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com-
partment, keep the engine hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
# Remove cap 1 by the tab. # Add washer fluid.
Maintenance and care 257
Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function are switched off. R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is
switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
258 Maintenance and care
R The blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off.
R The windshield wiper switch is in position 0. R In car washes with a towing mechanism: neu-
tral i is engaged. R The SmartKey is at a distance of at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. % If you remove the wax from the windshield and the wiper rubber after the car wash you will avoid smearing and reduce the noise made by the windshield wipers.
Information on using a power washer
& WARNING Risk of accident when using high-pressure cleaning equipment with round-spray nozzles
The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus- pension components that is not visible.
Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. # Do not use high-pressure cleaning
equipment with round-spray nozzles to clean your vehicle. # Damaged tires or suspension compo- nents must be replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a power washer: R Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning.
R Observe the information on the correct dis- tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper- ating instructions.
R Do not point the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts such as tires, slits, electrical component parts, batteries, light sources and ventilation slots.
Washing the vehicle by hand Observe legal requirements, for example in some countries washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent such as car sham-
poo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water and a
soft car sponge. While doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Hose down the vehicle carefully with water and dry it with a leather cloth. Make sure that the water jet is not pointed directly into the air inlet grille.
Maintenance and care 259
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care Observe the following information:
Information on cleaning and care
Avoiding damage to the paintwork
Paint Matte finish
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuel and greases:
gently rub with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover.
R The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.
R Only use care products recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not apply stickers, films etc. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. R Do not have your vehicle cleaned at an automatic car
wash too frequently and do not use wash programs which finish with a hot wax vehicle treatment. R Do not use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products such as a gloss preserver, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
260 Maintenance and care
Notes on care of vehicle parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes and tailpipe trim
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.
# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.
# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down before you touch them.
Observe the following information:
Information on cleaning and care
Wheels/rims
Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners.
Windows
Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp cloth and cleaning products recommended by MercedesBenz.
Avoiding vehicle damage
R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake linings, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brake linings warm up and dried out.
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Wiper blades Exterior lighting AIRPANEL
Sensors Rear view camera and 360° Camera Tailpipes
Maintenance and care 261
Information on cleaning and care
Avoiding vehicle damage
Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Clean the lens with a wet sponge and mild detergent, e.g. car Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
shampoo.
for plastic lenses.
If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in the radiator trim may be restricted. R Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati-
cally after approximately 120 seconds. R Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a high-pres-
sure water jet.
When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers and in the radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
R Open the camera cover with the multimedia sys- tem( page 184) .
R Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
Do not use a high-pressure water jet.
Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz, Use acid-free cleaning agents. particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
262 Maintenance and care
Notes on care of the interior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
parts breaking off after the use of sol- vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous.
When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod-
ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
Observe the following information:
Information on cleaning and care
Seat belts
Clean with warm water and soap solution.
Display Plastic trim
Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz.
Avoiding vehicle damage
R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F
(80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
R Switch off the display and allow to cool. R Do not use any other cleaning products.
R Do not apply stickers, films etc. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
come in contact with the plastic trim.
Maintenance and care 263
Genuine wood/trim elements
Roof lining Carpet Genuine leather seat covers DINAMICA seat cov- ers Artificial leather seat covers Cloth seat covers
Information on cleaning and care R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soap solution. R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz. Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz. R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Clean with a damp cloth.
Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution.
Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution and allow to dry.
Avoiding vehicle damage Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. Do not use a microfiber cloth. Do not use a microfiber cloth.
264 Breakdown assistance Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in the safety vest compartments in the driver's and front passenger door stowage compartments.
# To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop 2.
# Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the safety vest.
% There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stowed.
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest if: R It is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips
can no longer be removed. R The maximum number of washes is excee-
ded. R The fluorescence of the safety vest has
faded.
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not use a laundry dryer 6 Do not dry-clean 7 This is a class 2 vest
Flat tire Notes on flat tires
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac- teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive on with a flat tire.
# Change the flat tire immediately with the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip- ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos-
sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) ( page 265). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit ( page 266). R Vehicles with a Mercedes-Benz emer- gency call system: in the event of a break-
down, consult the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Customer Assistance Center. R Change the wheel ( page 308).
MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How- ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con- junction with an activated tire pressure monitor- ing system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: R Check the tire for damage R If driving on, observe the following notes
Breakdown assistance 265
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
When driving in limp-home mode, the han- dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when cornering, when accelerating strongly and when braking. # Do not exceed the maximum permissi-
ble speed. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, cross-coun- try). This applies, in particular, to a loa- ded vehicle. # Stop driving in limp-home mode if you notice: R banging noise R vehicle vibration R smoke which smells like rubber R continuous ESP® intervention R cracks in tire side walls
# After driving in limp-home mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special-
266 Breakdown assistance
ist workshop with regard to their further use. # The defective tire must be replaced in every case.
Driving distance possible in limp-home mode after the pressure loss warning
Load condition
Driving distance pos- sible in limp-home mode
Partially laden
50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden
19 miles (30 km)
R The driving distance possible in limp-home mode may vary depending on the driving style.
R Maximum permissible speed 50 mph (80 km/h).
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com- partment floor.
1 Tire inflation compressor 2 Tire sealant bottle Using the TIREFIT kit Have the following readily available: R Tire sealant bottle R Enclosed TIREFIT sticker R Tire inflation compressor
You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal punctu- res of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C).
& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant.
In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: R There are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those previously mentioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at a very low tire pres-
sure or on a flat tire. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. Do not allow it to come into contact
with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor- oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina- ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla- tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire.
Breakdown assistance 267
# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
268 Breakdown assistance # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of
tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. # Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downward
into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres- sor.
# Remove the cap from valve 7 on the defec- tive tire.
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. # Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle. # Switch the ignition on.
# Press on and off switch 3 on the tire infla- tion compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum- ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres- sor during this phase. # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been reached: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
defective tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Very slowly drive forward or reverse approx-
imately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance.
Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair braking and han- dling characteristics. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been reached:
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Do not exceed the specified maximum
speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).
Breakdown assistance 269
# Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster where it will be eas- ily seen by the driver.
* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz service center.
# Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
defective tire.
# Stow the tire sealant bottle, the tire inflation compressor and the warning triangle.
# Pull away immediately. # Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam- aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the braking prop- erties and the handling characteristics. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
270 Breakdown assistance
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side Bpillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. # To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2.
# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
# Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.
# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot- tle.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work- shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat- tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel-
evant systems, for example the lighting sys- tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a simi- lar incident, contact a qualified special- ist workshop immediately.
# Do not continue driving. # Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS ( page 155) R Further information on ESP®( page 156)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes- ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam- aged in the event of an accident. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat- tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. All vehicles + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
Breakdown assistance 271
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to connect the 12 volt battery, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an
272 Breakdown assistance apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode, or R Connect the battery to a battery charger
approved by Mercedes-Benz, or R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery # When charging the battery and during start-
ing assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over- voltage
When charging using a battery charger with- out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.4 V.
All other vehicles # When charging the battery and during start-
ing assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with- out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro- gen gas igniting
A battery generates hydrogen gas during the charging process. If there is a short circuit or sparks start to form, there is a danger of the hydrogen gas igniting. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # When connecting and disconnecting the battery, you must observe the descri- bed order for the battery clamps.
# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat- tery terminals with identical polarity.
# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con- necting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat- tery clamps while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo- sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking. # Make sure that there is sufficient venti-
lation during the charging process and during starting assistance. # Do not lean over a battery.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro- zen.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro- zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg- ing, battery gas may be released. # Always thaw a frozen battery out first
before charging it or performing start- ing assistance.
* NOTE Shortening the service life of the battery by charging the battery at low temperatures
Charging the battery at very low tempera- tures may shorten the service life of the bat- tery and have a negative effect on starting. # Do not charge the battery at very low
temperatures.
Breakdown assistance 273
The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat- tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg-
ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con- nection point.
274 Breakdown assistance
R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.
R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery. R When charging: only use battery chargers
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and read the battery charger's operating instruc- tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided
using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Gasoline engine: Only accept starting assis- tance if the engine is cold and the exhaust system has cooled down.
# Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
# Automatic transmission: Shift the trans- mission to position j.
# Make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off.
# Open the hood.
# Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc- tion of the arrow.
# Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first.
# During the starting assistance proce- dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat- tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
# During the charging process: start the charging process.
# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
# During starting assistance: before discon- necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec- trical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is complete: # First, remove the jumper cable/charging
cable from ground point 3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first. # After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
You can obtain further information on starting assistance at any qualified specialist workshop.
Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.
Breakdown assistance 275
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- ing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
276 Breakdown assistance Permitted towing methods
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion 4MATIC vehicles
Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) No
No
Rear axle raised Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock. No
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods ( page 276) ( page 275).
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.
When the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started. R The electric parking brake cannot be
released or applied.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i or j.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle ( page 278). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow- ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 31 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 31 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
Breakdown assistance 277
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even overturn.
# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate . # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger
door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j. # Install the towing eye ( page 280). # Attach the tow bar.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- tion
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ( page 58).
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 163). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position i. # Release the electric parking brake.
278 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi- ted safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R the ignition is switched off. R the brake system or power steering sys-
tem is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif- icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely, before towing the vehicle away.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport # Observe the notes on towing away
( page 276). # Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to
load the vehicle. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position i. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power ( page 272).
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)
& WARNING Risk of accident when trans- porting vehicles with AIR BODY CON- TROL
The reduced damping forces on the vehicle being transported can cause the vehicle/ trailer combination to start to swing. As a result, when transporting vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL the vehicle/trailer com- bination may start to skid. Consequently, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident and injury.
# Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissi- ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when transporting.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur- ing it incorrectly
# After loading, the vehicle must be secured at all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up and 4 in (10 cm) down must be kept to the transport platform.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
Breakdown assistance 279 Towing eye storage location
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transport vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi- cle.
Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the cargo compartment under the cargo compart- ment floor. Vehicles with folding bench seat: The towing eye is located under a cover.
280 Breakdown assistance Installing the towing eye
# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi- cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc- ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans- mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa- ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri- cal components or systems. # Only use Mercedes-Benz approved
fuses with the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the cargo compartment ( page 283).
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side ( page 281) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
( page 282) R Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
( page 282) R Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 283)
Fuse box in the engine compartment
Prerequisites Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 280). Have the following readily available: R A dry cloth R A screwdriver
Breakdown assistance 281
Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
282 Breakdown assistance
# Turn clip 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to the left.
# Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3 from the top.
Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor-
rectly in the lid.
# Insert lid into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.
# Fold down lid of the fuse box and tighten screws 4.
# Insert cover 1 on both sides and engage safety clips.
# Close the hood.
Cockpit fuse box The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter for further information.
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell Prerequisites Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 280).
Breakdown assistance 283
# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Fuse box in the cargo compartment Requirements Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 280). # Fold down the side cover.
# Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the arrow.
# Remove cover 1.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
284 Wheels and tires
Noise or unusual handling characteristics While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam- age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident from dam- aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. # Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that in heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu- lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire contact sur- face. # Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tire contact surface across the entire width of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg- ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g. prior to a long journey or driving off-road: R Check the tire pressure ( page 285). R Visual check of wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps.
The valves must be protected against mois- ture and dirt by the valve caps approved especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Visual check of the tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm).
Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Notes on snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect mounting of snow chains If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.
Wheels and tires 285
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front
wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear
wheels in pairs.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
R If snow chains are mounted, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
R Vehicles with Parking Pilot: Do not use Parking Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains are mounted.
R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Only drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains are mounted.
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away ( page 159). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: R The tires may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
286 Wheels and tires
R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
# Comply with the recommended tire pressure and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel regu- larly:
R at least once a month R when the load changes R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
Driving with tire pressure that is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage.
R Adversely affect handling characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a result. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the han- dling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire defects as a result of overheating. R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption
& WARNING Risk of accident from exces- sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by highway fill, pot holes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Excessively high tire pressure can result in: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. # Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects. # Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Bpillar of your vehicle ( page 291). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap ( page 287).
Observe the maximum tire pressure ( page 298).
Wheels and tires 287
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem: You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C) increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tire pressure of warm tires. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.
& WARNING Risk of accident from unsuita- ble accessories on the tire valves
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Tire pressure monitoring systems for retrofitting will cause the tire valve to remain open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example
data.
288 Wheels and tires
R Maximum tire pressure ( page 298)
The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehi- cle. The recommended tire pressures apply to cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for those tire sizes. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num- bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall ( page 299). Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285) R Tire and Loading Information placard
( page 291)
Checking the tire pressure manually
# Read the tire pressure for the current operat- ing conditions from the tire and loading infor- mation table or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.
# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.
# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom- mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285) R Tire pressure table ( page 287) R Tire and Loading Information placard
( page 291)
Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem
& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor- rect tire pressure
Every tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked when cold at least once a month and inflated to the pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer (see Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pres- sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap of your vehicle). If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
tire pressure table, you need to determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure indicator lamp when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, if the low tire pressure indicator lamp lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also increases fuel consump- tion and reduces tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and braking abil- ity. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure indicator lamp. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
Wheels and tires 289
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When the system detects a malfunction, the indica- tor lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina- ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea- sons, including the installation of incompati- ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction warning lamp after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- erly.
290 Wheels and tires
The system checks the tire pressure of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pres- sure sensor. New tire pressure sensor, e.g. in winter tires, are automatically taught-in the first time they are driven. The tire pressure appears in the multifunction display ( page 201). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, a warning will be given: R Via display messages ( page 354). R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster ( page 384).
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taughtin to the tire pressure monitor. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem will automatically update the new reference
values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val- ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually ( page 291).
System limitations The tire pressure monitoring system does not issue a warning: R If the tire pressure is set incorrectly. R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire. R If there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285)
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres- sure monitoring system
Requirements R The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer: , Service . Tire Pressure One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure of each wheel:
R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes
R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni- tored.
# Compare the tire pressure with the recom- mended tire pressure for the current operat-
Wheels and tires 291
ing condition ( page 287). Observe the notes on tire temperature ( page 285). % The values displayed in the multifunction dis- play may deviate from those of the tire pres- sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by pressure gauges may be higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem
Requirements R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating condition on each of the four wheels ( page 285).
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed.
R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly mounted.
On-board computer: , Service . Tire Pressure # Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message is shown in the multi- function display. # Press a to confirm the restart. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp goes out. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pres- sures are within the specified range. The cur- rent tire pressures are then accepted as ref- erence values and monitored. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285)
Radio-type approval of the tire pressure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers Country Radio equipment approval
number
Canada USA
FCC ID: MRXAG5SP4 FCC ID: MRXMFR IC: 2546A-AG5SP4
Further information on the declaration of con- formity for wireless vehicle components ( page 19).
Loading the vehicle Tire and Loading Information placard
& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa- ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris- tics and lead to brake failure.
292 Wheels and tires # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
% The data shown in the image is example data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage.
R Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate . R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres-
sure table ( page 287). Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load
( page 292) R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285)
Determining the maximum permissible load The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur- suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
Wheels and tires 293
# Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." ("The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.") on your vehicle's tire and loading information table.
# Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
# Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
# Step 4: The resulting figure equals the per- missible load for cargo and luggage. For example: If "XXX" equals 1400 lbs and there are five occupants in your vehicle with a weight of 150 lbs each, the maximum cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
# Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being carried in the vehi- cle. For safety reasons, this weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Even if you have calculated the total load care- fully, you should still make sure that the maxi- mum permissible gross mass and the maximum permissible axle load of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle including driver,
occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max- imum load ( page 293) R Tire and Loading Information placard ( page 291) R Tire pressure table ( page 287) R Vehicle identification plate
Calculation example for determining the maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi- cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard ( page 291). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
294 Wheels and tires Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard) Step 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the occupants Weight of occupants
Total weight of all occupants
Example 1 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Example 1 5
Front: 2 Rear: 3 Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg)
Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Example 2 1 Front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs
rating from the Tire and Loading Information
(340 kg)
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
Wheels and tires 295
Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)
296 Wheels and tires Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard ( page 296)
2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number ( page 297)
3 Maximum tire load ( page 298) 4 Maximum tire pressure ( page 298)
5 Manufacturer 6 Tire characteristics ( page 299) 7 Tire size designation, load rating, speed rat-
ing and load index ( page 299) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the image is example
data.
Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Trans- portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per- formance factors:
1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade
% The data shown in the image is example data.
% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified test track of the US Department of Transportation. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction grade
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade- quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include either accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. # Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin
# Avoid wheelspin.
The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas- ured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces made of asphalt and concrete. Temperature grade
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres-
sures and regularly check the tire pres-
Wheels and tires 297
sure of all tires including the spare wheel. # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- tained high temperatures can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. Fur- thermore, excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the requirements of the US Department of Transportation.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man- ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.
298 Wheels and tires
% The data shown in the image is example data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu- facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tire have a code with four symbols. Further infor- mation on retreaded tires ( page 304).
R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size.
R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.
R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi- ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci- fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv- er's side ( page 291). Specifications for maximum tire pressure
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci- fied for the tire. Information on tire characteristics
% The data shown in the image is example data.
This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
Wheels and tires 299
1 Preceding letter 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index % The data shown in the image is example
data. Information on reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
300 Wheels and tires
Preceding letter 1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu-
facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per- cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R" radial tires R "D": diagonal or bias-ply tires R "B": diagonal radial tires or bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tires with a maximum speed
above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6 Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (for example, "91" corresponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the permissible gross axle load of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard ( page 291) R Maximum tire load ( page 298) R Load index
Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.
% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Index
Speed rating
ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR1
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h).
R If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the max- imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
R If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S2 T M+S2
up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu- facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.
Load index 8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein-
forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire
1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+S i" for winter tires
Wheels and tires 301
R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure
Definitions for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly- ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi- cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
302 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow- ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen- ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac- tory. The tire and information table contains the rec- ommended tire pressure for cold tires, the maxi- mum permissible load and the maximum permis- sible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded tire pressure for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum gross axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso- ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug- gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli- cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci- fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the unladen weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accesso- ries, the maximum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand- ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if
Wheels and tires 303
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi- mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi- mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur- chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the max- imum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric- tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi- tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi- nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
304 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, mounting and replacing tires You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen- sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to vehicle and tires due to non-approved tire types and sizes
For safety reasons, only use wheels, tires and accessories which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tires only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension var- iations could cause the tires to come into contact with the body and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar- anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles. # Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures
Using summer tires at very low ambient tem- peratures can cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use
M+S tires.
Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair operating safety.
Wheels and tires 305
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
driving style accordingly. # Use M+S tire at outside temperatures
of less than 10 °C (50 °F).
306 Wheels and tires
Observe the following when selecting, mounting and replacing tires: R Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only mount wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to deviate from this rule in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: All mounted wheels must be equip- ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win- ter tires or all-season tires marked M+S for all wheels.
Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym- bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road condi- tions.
R For M+S tire , only use tires with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tire mounted. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed, this must be indicated in an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km).
R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tires that do not fea- ture run-flat characteristics: Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, for example winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285)
R Tire and Loading Information placard ( page 291)
R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index ( page 299)
R Tire pressure table ( page 287)
Notes on interchanging wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ- ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tires have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris- tics. The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com- ponents may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen- sions.
Wheels and tires 307
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tire R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the
tire On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, interchange the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's war- ranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, interchange the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so.
Notes on storing wheels R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi- cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack R Chock R Wheel wrench R Centering pin
The tire-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under the cargo compartment floor.
1 Tool bag
Tool bag 1 contains: R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centering pin R Folding wheel chock R Ratchet for jack
308 Wheels and tires Setting up the folding wheel chock
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements R The required tire-change tool kit is available.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.
R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift into position j. # Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Set the
normal vehicle level ( page 176). # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # Remove the hub caps if necessary ( page 308). # Raise the vehicle ( page 309).
Removing and mounting hub caps
Requirements # The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
( page 308).
Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub
cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To mount: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.
Aluminum hub cap
# To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
% The socket can be found in the tire-change tool kit.
# Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it. # To mount: position hub cap 1 and turn
until it is completely flush with the wheel. # Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
# Attach wheel wrench 3 to socket 2 and tighten the hub cap clockwise. Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
# Raise the vehicle ( page 309).
Wheels and tires 309
R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The base of the jack must be positioned ver- tically under the jack support point.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
( page 308). R The hub caps have been removed
( page 308).
Important notes on using the jack: R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte- nance work under the vehicle.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle. R Do not lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release
the parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail-
gate.
310 Wheels and tires # Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.
Position of jack support points
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri-
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned ver- tically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi- cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup- port points.
# Take the ratchet wrench out of the tirechange tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
# Position jack 2 at jack support point 1. # Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack
2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. # Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. # Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 311).
Wheels and tires 311
Removing a wheel Requirements R The vehicle is raised ( page 309). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.
# Screw centering pin 1 instead of the wheel bolt into the thread.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. # Remove the wheel. # Mount the new wheel ( page 311).
Mounting a new wheel Requirements R The wheel is removed ( page 311).
312 Wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv- ing. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tires ( page 304).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc- tion of rotation when mounting.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen- tering pin and push it on.
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles, as well as for the wheel in question.
* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw- ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.
# Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.
# Unscrew the centering pin. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight. # Lower the vehicle( page 312).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements R The new wheel has been mounted
( page 311). # Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible. # To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet wrench of the jack counter-clockwise.
# Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- ted wheel and adjust accordingly.
# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: restart the tire pressure monitoring system ( page 291).
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure ( page 285)
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5). Specified tightening torque: 111 lb-ft (150 Nm).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # Have the tightening torque checked
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop after changing a wheel.
Wheels and tires 313
314 Technical data
Notes on technical data The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle electronics Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident from incor- rectly carried out work on the RF trans- mitter
The electromagnetic radiation from RF trans- mitters can interfere with the vehicle elec- tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident from incor- rect operation of the RF transmitter
If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, e.g.: R if the RF transmitter is not connected to
an exterior antenna R if the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not a low-reflection type.
This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special- ist workshop. # When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per- mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.
1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fender On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna on the front or rear roof area is not permitted.
Technical data 315
On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equip- ment) when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wir- ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's sup- plements when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table:
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band
Maximum transmis- sion output
Short wave 3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m band 74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m band 144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio sys- tem/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm band 420 - 450 MHz
35 W
Mobile communica- tions (2G/3G/4G)
10 W
316 Technical data
The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R RF transmitter with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- lowing frequency bands: R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm band R 2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Permissible gross mass 2 Permissible front axle load 3 Permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
Never exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight or the maximum permissible axle load for the front or rear axle. VIN in front of the right-hand front seat
Additional plates
Technical data 317
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Permissible gross mass 2 Permissible front axle load 3 Permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum permissible axle load is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).
1 VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering
1 Plate with information about emissions test- ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California
2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identification number)
318 Technical data
Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm- ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con-
tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat- ing fluids.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre- sponsible disposal
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi- ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products recommended by MercedesBenz. Damage caused by using vehicle products which have not been recommended is not cov- ered by the Mercedes-Benz guarantee, warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating flu- ids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com (by entering the designation) R At a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion caused by fuel
Fuels are highly inflammable. # You must avoid fire, open flames, creat-
ing sparks and smoking. # Before refueling, switch off the engine
and, if installed in your vehicle, the sta- tionary heater.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your health # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapors.
# Keep children away from fuel.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a gasoline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur premium
grade fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Do not refuel using: R Diesel R E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline containing methanol (M15, M30,
M85, M100) R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul- fur, this can produce unpleasant odors.
Technical data 319
Only refuel with fuel, that has at least the octane number specified in the information table in the fuel filler flap ( page 145). This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower RON.
* NOTE Premature wear caused by unlea- ded regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon- gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre- mium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum speed.
320 Technical data
# Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.
Further information on fuel can be found: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R USA only: Under http://www.mbusa.com Information on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
* NOTE Damage caused by non-approved additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The fuel grade available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in
consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Notes on fuel consumption
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Increased CO2 emissions caused by increased fuel con- sumption
The CO2 emissions of your vehicle depend directly on the fuel consumption. # You can minimize CO2 emissions by
driving carefully and having your vehicle serviced regularly.
Tank capacity and reserve fuel level
Capacity Model
Total capacity
All models
17.4 US gal (66.0 l) or
21.1 US gal (80.0 l)
Model
Of which reserve
All models
1.8 US gal (7.0 l)
Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica- tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on engine oils and oil filters: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com (by entering the designation) R At a qualified specialist workshop
Quality and filling capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Gasoline engines
MB-Freigabe or MBApproval
All models
229.5, 229.6
The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter:
Capacity
Model
Capacity
All models
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
Technical data 321
Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys- tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly changed at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
322 Technical data
Further information on brake fluid: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com R At a qualified specialist workshop
Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart- ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening.
# Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ant
# Only add coolant that has been pre- mixed with the required antifreeze pro- tection.
Further information on coolant: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1, e.g. online at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. R At a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem- peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro- tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use an appropriate coolant.
Have the coolant regularly changed at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C)). R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 °F (-45 °C)).
Coolant filling capacity
Filling capacity Model
Filling capacity
All models
12.7 US qt (12.0 l)
Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior light- ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa- ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter- Fit.
Technical data 323
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- terFit with other windshield washer flu- ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio refer to the informa- tion on the antifreeze reservoir. Add windshield washer fluid to the washer water all year round.
Refrigerant Notes on refrigerants Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 318).
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger- ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli- mate control system may be damaged. # Only use the refrigerant R134a
* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com- pressor oil
# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger- ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to.
324 Technical data
1 Warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 Refrigerant type
Warning symbols 1 advise you about: R Possible dangers R Having service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Refrigerant filling capacity
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model
Refrigerant
All models
22.2 ± 0.4 oz (630 ± 10 g)
Model
PAG oil
All models
2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment
Opening height Model
All models
1 2 Head- Opening room height 81.8 in 76.8 in (2077 mm) (1951 mm)
Vehicle dimensions All models Vehicle length
Vehicle width including out- side mirrors Vehicle height
Wheelbase
Turning circle
194.2 in (4933 mm)
81.3 in (2065 mm)
58.4 in (1483 mm)
115.7 in (2939 mm)
39.0 ft (11.90 m)
Weights and loads
Please note that for the specified vehicle data: R items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the maximum pay- load.
Roof load All models
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
Technical data 325
326 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Introduction
Notes on display messages Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim- plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis- play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the % button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a dis- play message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid- den. The multifunction display shows these dis- play messages continuously until the cause for the display message has been rectified.
Calling up stored display messages On-board computer: , Service . 1 Message
If there are no display messages, No Messages appears in the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. # To exit the message memory: press the % button.
Safety systems Display messages
! ÷
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 327
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer- gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
328 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
! ÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer- gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
÷
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 329
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
330 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa- tion.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 331
Display messages
T ! ÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer- gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
332 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch the ignition on.
* The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is applied while driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled . R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake . # Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled. # Release the electric parking brake manually.
Display messages
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 333
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually .
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow ! and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamps are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually . or # Release the electric parking brake automatically . If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
334 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually .
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow indicator lamp ! is on and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the battery charge level is too low: # Charge the battery.
To apply: # Switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.
Display messages
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 335
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed away. This is not necessary when towing the vehicle away with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually .
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually .
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
336 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level
#
Check Brake Pad Wear
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not add brake fluid.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not add brake fluid.
* The brake linings have reached their wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 337
Display messages Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual
Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations . # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine.
* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE® PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* PRESAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Side PRE-SAFE® Impulse is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
338 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: R soiling of the sensors R heavy rain R extended driving on inter-urban roads without moving traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors . # Restart the engine.
Display messages
6
SRS Malfunction Service Required
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 339
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 27).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Recognizing a restraint system malfunction R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
340 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
6
Example:Front Left Malfunction Service Required
6
Example:Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 27).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Detection of a restraint system malfunction R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning ( page 32).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. # Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 341
Display messages
G
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual
* The front passenger airbag and the knee airbag are deactivated, even though an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an adult is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff . # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
342 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag and knee airbags are enabled during the journey: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat. R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied.
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury by using a child restraint system with the front passenger airbag enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff . # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Driving systems Display messages
À
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!
À
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative
É
Vehicle Rising
É
Vehicle Rising Please Wait
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 343
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver ( page 191). # If necessary, take a break.
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
* The vehicle level is too low and the vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
344 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
É
Malfunction See Operator's Manual
É
Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* You have pulled away although the vehicle level was too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: # Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE The tires of the front axle or the front fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con-
ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level . Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle is raised.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 345
Display messages
É
Drive More Slowly
É
Compressor Is Cooling Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. # In order to adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). # In order to adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).
* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle continues rising to the selected vehicle level.
* Active Lane keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( page 195). Vehicles with Steering Pilot: The camera view may be restricted by the windshield. # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
If the display message does not disappear on vehicles with Steering Pilot: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield. * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
346 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Vehicles without Steering Pilot: The camera view is reduced. Possible causes are: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 193). # Drive on. When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal- functioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 347
Display messages Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Example:Parking Pilot Parking Canceled
ë
Off Distance Pilot Now Available
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 193). # Drive on. When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine. * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The parking assistance systems of Parking Pilot were interrupted. You have opened the driver's door or touched the steering wheel, for example. # Steer and brake manually. * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function .
* Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated ( page 167).
348 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Distance Pilot Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Distance Pilot Inoperative
Steering Pilot Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Steering Pilot Inoperative
¯ --- mph
Cruise Control Off
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( page 165). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
* Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Steering Pilot is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( page 171). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision.
* Steering Pilot is malfunctioning. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control .
* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically ( page 163).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 349
Display messages Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual Cruise Control Inoperative
Parking Pilot Maneuvering Assistance Restricted See Operator's Manual Parking Pilot and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and confirm the display message.
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable. # Press the left-hand Touch Control and confirm the display message.
* Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Parking Pilot and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( page 186). Beware of the entire vehicle surroundings. # As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
* Parking Pilot and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine. # If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
350 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine Display messages Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual
?
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant . * The fan motor is malfunctioning.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 248 °F (120 °C).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 351
Display messages
?
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below 248 °F (120 °C).
352 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
#
See Operator's Manual
#
Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The battery is not being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
4
Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling
8
Fuel Level Low
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 353
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The battery charge level is too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Start the engine. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level when next refueling. Add engine oil ( page 254). Notes on engine oil ( page 320). * The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
354 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
#
Start Engine See Operator's Manual
8
Gas Cap Loose
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance. The battery charges.
* There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires Display messages
h
Please Correct Tire Pressure
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure differences between the wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # If the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitoring system .
Display messages
h
Check Tires
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 355
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.
356 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
h
Warning Tire Malfunction Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways: R The tires can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes on flat tires ( page 264). # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the tires. * No signals can be received from the tire pressure sensor due to strong radio signal source interference. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.
The tire pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 357
Display messages
h
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative
Tires Overheated
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed. # Have the defective tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The wheels mounted do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactiva- ted. # Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * At least one tire is overheated. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow. # Drive more slowly.
358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Tires Overheated Decrease Speed
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * At least one tire is overheated.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
# Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
SmartKey Display messages
Â
Obtain a New Key
Â
Replace Key Battery
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey needs to be replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Change the battery .
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359
Display messages
Â
Key Not Detected (white display message)
Â
Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual
Â
Key Not Detected (red dis- play message)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not detected, start the engine with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment .
* The SmartKey detection function is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment .
* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the stowage compartment for starting the engine with the SmartKey .
360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Â
Don't Forget Your Key
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicle Display messages Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine
Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. * The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h. # Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle.
* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i. # Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j. # To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361
Display messages Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer
d
Vehicle Operational Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Transmission Malfunction Stop
Reversing Not Possible Service Required
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The transmission can only be shifted to position j when the vehicle is stationary.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted. # When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not shift the transmis- sion position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition and take the SmartKey with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the 12volt battery might discharge and it will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a donor battery (starting assistance).
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Switch the transmission to position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling
Auxiliary Battery Malfunction
Ð
Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Start the engine. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
* The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
Ð
Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual
Ð
Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Active Hood Malfunction See Operator's Manual
?
C
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The active hood (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * The engine hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. # Never unlatch the engine hood while driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. # Close the hood. * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.
Display messages
A _
Example:Rear Left Backrest Not Latched
¥
Check Washer Fluid
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The tailgate is open. & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. # Close the tailgate. * The corresponding seat backrest of the rear bench seat is not engaged. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages.
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid .
366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Lights Display messages
b
Example:Check Left Low Beam
b
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is defective. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. % LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the light-emitting diodes in the lamp have failed.
* The active light function is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Headlamps Inoperative
b
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See Operator's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367
Display messages
b
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Auto Lamp Function Inoperative
b
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position.
Switch Off Lights
b
* You are driving without low beam. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
Switch On Headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached ( page 116). # Drive on. When the causes no longer apply, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message appears.
368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The camera view is reduced. Possible causes are: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes no longer apply, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.
Warning and indicator lamps Overview of warning and indicator lamps
Some systems perform a self-test when the igni- tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after the engine is started or during a journey.
Instrument Display (standard)
Warning and indicator lamps:
L
Low beam ( page 114)
T
Parking lights ( page 114)
K
High beam ( page 115)
#! Turn signal light ( page 115)
R
Rear fog light ( page 114)
ü
Seat belt is not fastened ( page 377)
$
USA: brakes (red) ( page 369)
J
Canada: brakes (red) ( page 369)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369
! ÷ å F
!
ABS defective ( page 369)
ESP®( page 369)
ESP® OFF ( page 369) USA: electric parking brake applied (red) ( page 369) Canada: electric parking brake applied (red) ( page 369)
!
Ð
# 6 ;
Electric parking brake (yellow) ( page 369) Steering assistance defective ( page 379) Electrical fault ( page 380) Restraint system ( page 369) Engine diagnosis ( page 380)
8
? · h
Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca- tion indicator ( page 380) Coolant too hot/cold ( page 380) Distance warning ( page 378) Tire pressure monitoring system ( page 384)
Safety systems Warning/indicator lamp
é
RBS warning lamp (USA/ CND)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow RBS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
$ J Brake warning lamp (USA)
Brakes warning lamp (Can- ada)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes are: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking. Braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not add brake fluid.
Warning/indicator lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. USA only: if an additional display message appears with the # symbol in the multifunction display, the brake linings have reached their wear limit. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
!
ABS warning lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp flashes
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer- gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® is intervening . # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
Warning/indicator lamp
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
å
ESP® OFF warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® .
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375
Warning/indicator lamp
F
Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (USA
! only)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking brake malfunctions. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (Can-
! ada only)
Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is mal- functioning
376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
6
Restraint system warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for exam- ple. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Seat belts Warning/indicator lamp
7
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
7
Seat belt warning lamp flashes
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt . If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the warning lamp may remain lit. The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt . There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp
·
Distance warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.
Active Brake Assist .
Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp
Ð
Power steering system warning lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine Warning/indicator lamp
;
Engine diagnosis warning lamp
#
Electrical malfunction warn- ing lamp
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
?
Coolant warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes are: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is defective
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 248 °F (120 °C).
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Otherwise: # Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level . # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 248 °F (120 °C).
384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tires Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.
Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
386 Index
1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) 360° Camera ........................................... 184
Care .................................................... 260 Function .............................................. 184 Selecting a view ................................... 186
A A/C function
Activating/deactivating (control panel) .................................................. 128 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 155 Acceleration see Kickdown Access data Setting ................................................. 234 Acoustic locking verification signal Switching on/off ................................... 52 Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 193 Activating/deactivating ....................... 195 Brake application ................................. 194 Function/notes ................................... 193
System limits ....................................... 193 Towing a trailer .................................... 194 Active Brake Assist ................................. 159 Function/notes ................................... 159 Setting ................................................. 163 Active Emergency Stop Assist ................ 172
Active hood (pedestrian protection) ...... 251 Method of operation ............................ 251 Resetting ............................................. 251
Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 172
Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 195 Function .............................................. 195 Sensitivity (function/notes) ................. 198 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 198 Switching on/off ................................. 197 System limits ....................................... 195 Towing a trailer .................................... 195
Adaptive cruise control see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function ............................................... 116 Switching on/off .................................. 117
Additives .................................................. 320 Engine oil ............................................ 320 Fuel ..................................................... 320
Additives (engine oil) see Additives
Additives (fuel) see Fuel
Adjusting the balance/fader Burmester® surround sound system .... 249
Adjusting the sound optimization Burmester® surround sound system .... 249
ADS PLUS damping system see AIR BODY CONTROL
After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag Activation .............................................. 27 Front air bag .......................................... 32 Knee air bag .......................................... 32 Side air bag ........................................... 32 Window air bag ...................................... 32
Air bags Installation locations ............................. 32
Index 387
Overview ............................................... 32 Air bags
see Occupant safety
AIR BODY CONTROL ................................. 174 Setting ................................................. 176 Suspension .......................................... 174
Air conditioning system see Climate control
Air distribution ......................................... 127
Air freshener system see Fragrance system
Air suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL
Air vents ................................................... 131 Adjusting (front) ................................... 131 Adjusting (rear passenger compart- ment) ................................................... 131 Glove box ............................................. 131
Air vents see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode ............................ 129
Airbag Protection .............................................. 33 Reduced protection ............................... 34
Airflow ...................................................... 127
AIRPANEL (Care) ...................................... 260 Alarm
see Panic alarm Alarm system
see Protection against theft Ambient lighting ...................................... 119 Animals
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 50 Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-theft alarm system
Protection against theft ......................... 75 Anti-theft protection
Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................. 76 Immobilizer ............................................ 75 Anticipatory occupant protection ..... 39, 40 Ashtray Front center console ............................ 107
Rear passenger compartment ............. 108 Assistance graphic
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 203 Assistance systems
see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 250 Battery disconnection periods ............. 251 Displaying the service due date ........... 250 Function/notes ................................... 250 Regular service work ........................... 250 Special service requirements .............. 250
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Deactivating the alarm ........................... 76 Function ................................................ 75
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) see Protection against theft
ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 191, 193 Activating/deactivating ....................... 193 Function ............................................... 191 System limitations ............................... 191
Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST
388 Index
Audio 20 see Multimedia system
Audio mode Activating media mode ........................ 238 Connecting USB devices ..................... 239 Copyright ............................................. 237 Information .......................................... 237 Inserting/removing SD memory card ............................................................. 238 Media search ....................................... 240 Overview ............................................. 238 Pause and playback function ............... 239 Selecting a track ................................. 239 Selecting playback options .................. 239 Track list .............................................. 239
Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic car wash (care) ..................... 257 Automatic distance control
see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights .......................... 115 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 138
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 138
Automatic front passenger air bag shutoff
see Front passenger air bag shutoff Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating ....................... 125 Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 141 Drive program display .......................... 140 Drive programs .................................... 140 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 140 Engaging drive position ....................... 143 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 142 Kickdown ............................................. 144 Manual gear shifting ............................ 143 Selecting park position ........................ 142 Shifting to neutral ................................ 142 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ......... 143 Transmission position display .............. 141 Transmission positions ......................... 141 Automatic transmission see Selector lever
Automatic volume adjustment .............. 220
B
Bag hook .................................................. 102
BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 155 Battery
Key ........................................................ 53 Battery (vehicle)
Charging .............................................. 272 Jump-starting ....................................... 272 Notes ................................................... 270 Battery (vehicle) see Vehicle battery Belt ............................................................. 28
Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 193 Activating/deactivating ....................... 195 Function/notes ................................... 193 System limits ....................................... 193
Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist
Blower see Climate control
Bluetooth® Activating/deactivating ....................... 220
Index 389
Settings ............................................... 220
Bluetooth® Audio Activating ............................................ 242 Adjusting the volume ........................... 242 De-authorizing (de-registering) the device .................................................. 242 Displaying device details ..................... 242 Information .......................................... 241 Overview .............................................. 241 Searching for and authorizing the device .................................................. 241
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid Notes ................................................... 321
Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion) ..................................................... 159
Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 155 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 155 Driving tips .......................................... 136 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion) ..................................................... 159
HOLD function ..................................... 173 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. 136 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs .................................................... 136 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 136 Brakes see Active Brake Assist Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown ............................................... 264 Changing a wheel ................................ 308 Overview of the help functions .............. 12 Roadside Assistance .............................. 17 Tow starting ........................................ 280 Towing away ........................................ 276 Transporting the vehicle ...................... 278
Burmester® surround sound system ..... 249 Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 249 Adjusting the sound optimization ........ 249 Calls up the sound menu ..................... 249 Information .......................................... 249 Setting treble, mid-range and bass ...... 249
Switching the surround sound on/off ............................................................. 249 Buttons Steering wheel .................................... 200
C California
Important information for private customers and lessees .......................... 18 Call lists Calling up the speed dial list ............... 230 Deleting speed dial presets ................. 230 Displaying details from a list entry ...... 229 Making a call ....................................... 229 Overview ............................................. 229 Setting up a speed dial list .................. 230 Calls .......................................................... 226 Accepting ............................................ 226 Activating functions during a call ........ 226 Calls with several participants ............. 227 Declining ............................................. 226 Ending a call ........................................ 226 Incoming call during an existing call .... 227 Making ................................................ 226
390 Index
Calls up the sound menu Burmester® surround sound system .... 249
Camera see 360° Camera see Rear view camera
Car wash see Care
Care .......................................................... 262 AIRPANEL ............................................ 260 Car wash ............................................. 257 Carpet ................................................. 262 Display ................................................ 262 Exterior lighting ................................... 260 Genuine wood/trim elements ............. 262 Matte finish ......................................... 259 Paintwork ............................................ 259 Plastic trim .......................................... 262 Power washer ...................................... 258 Rear view camera/360° Camera ........ 260 Roof lining ........................................... 262 Seat belts ............................................ 262 Seat cover ........................................... 262 Sensors ............................................... 260 Tailpipes .............................................. 260 Washing by hand ................................. 258
Wheels/rims ....................................... 260 Windows .............................................. 260 Wiper blades ....................................... 260 Cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting ............................. 99 Notes ..................................................... 98 Carpet (Care) ........................................... 262
Change of address ..................................... 17
Change of ownership ................................ 17 Changing a wheel
Lowering the vehicle ............................ 312 Mounting a new wheel ......................... 311 Preparation ......................................... 308 Raising the vehicle .............................. 309 Removing a wheel ................................ 311 Removing/mounting hub caps ............ 308 Changing hub caps ................................. 308 Character entry Function/notes .................................... 217 Charging Battery (vehicle) .................................. 272 Child safety lock Rear door .............................................. 48
Rear side windows ................................. 49 Child seat ................................................... 41
Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 47 Front passenger seat (rearwardfacing/forward-facing) .......................... 47 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 45 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (notes) .................. 44 Notes ..................................................... 41 Top Tether .............................................. 46 Child seat safety feature .......................... 43 Children Child seat safety feature ........................ 43 Restraint systems .................................. 41 Chock Storage location .................................. 307 Chock see Wheel chock Cigarette lighter ...................................... 108 Cleaning see Care Climate control ........................................ 127 Activating/deactivating ....................... 128
Index 391
Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ....................... 128 Activating/deactivating the synchro- nization function (control panel) .......... 128 Adjusting air vents ............................... 131 Air distribution settings ....................... 128 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 129 Automatic control ................................ 128 Defrosting the windows ....................... 129 Defrosts the windshield ....................... 127 Dual-zone automatic climate control panel ................................................... 127 Filling capacity for PAG oil ................... 324 Fragrance system ................................ 129 Glove box air vent ................................ 131 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra- grance system) .................................... 129 Ionization ............................................. 129 Multimedia system overview ............... 127 Note ..................................................... 127 Rear air vents ....................................... 131 Refrigerant .......................................... 323 Refrigerant filling capacity ................... 324 Sets the airflow ................................... 127 Setting the air distribution ................... 127 Setting the temperature ...................... 127
Switching the rear window heater on/off .................................................. 127 Windshield heater ................................ 130 Cockpit ......................................................... 4 Overview ................................................. 4 Combination switch see Turn signal light Combined luggage cover and net Attaching to the rear seat backrest ..... 100 Installing/removing ............................... 99 Computer ................................................. 200 Controller Operating ............................................. 212 Convenience closing ................................. 68
Convenience opening ................................ 67 Coolant (engine)
Checking level ..................................... 255 Filling capacity .................................... 322 Notes .................................................. 322 Cooling see Climate control
Copyright Licenses ................................................ 24 Trademarks ............................................ 24
Cornering light function .......................... 116
Cover .......................................................... 65
Cross Traffic Alert .................................... 191 Crosswind Assist
Function/notes ................................... 159 Cruise control .......................................... 163
Activating ............................................ 164 Calling up a speed ............................... 164 Deactivating ........................................ 164 Function .............................................. 163 Lever ................................................... 164 Prerequisites ....................................... 164 Selecting ............................................. 164 Setting a speed ................................... 164 Storing a speed ................................... 164 System limits ....................................... 163 Cup holder ............................................... 106 Installing/removing (center console) ... 106 Rear passenger compartment ............. 107
392 Index
Cup holder see Cup holder
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) .......... 21 Customer Relations Department ............. 21
D Dashboard
see Cockpit Dashboard lighting .................................. 202 Data acquisition
Vehicle .................................................. 22 Data import/export
Function/notes ................................... 221 Importing/exporting ............................ 221 PIN protection for data export ............. 222 Daytime running lights ............................ 118 Activating/deactivating ....................... 118 Daytime running lights mode see Daytime running lights Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 76 Declaration of Conformity Wireless vehicle components ................ 19
Definitions (tires and loading) ................ 301
Diagnostics connection ............................ 20
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 14
Digital speedometer ............................... 203
DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 141 Engaging drive position ....................... 143 Engaging park position automatically .. 142 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 142 Function ............................................... 141 Selecting park position ........................ 142 Shifting to neutral ................................ 142
Display Care .................................................... 262 Notes (multimedia system) .................. 210
Display (multimedia system) Deactivating ......................................... 219 Settings ............................................... 218
Display (on-board computer) .................. 201
Display message ..................................... 326 Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 326 Notes .................................................. 326
Display messages ? .......................................... 350, 364
A ................................................... 365
C ................................................... 364
¯ .................................................... 348 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 347 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... 347 Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Opera- tor's Manual ........................................ 349 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur- rently Limited See Operator's Man- ual ....................................................... 337 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi- ted See Operator's Manual .................. 337
b Active Headlamps Inoperative .... 366 Active Hood Malfunction See Opera- tor's Manual ........................................ 364
Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man- ual ....................................................... 346 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 345 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera- tive ...................................................... 345 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man- ual ....................................................... 368 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 367 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera- tive ...................................................... 367 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... 360
À ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative .......................................... 343
À ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! .................................................. 343
b Auto Lamp Function Inopera- tive ...................................................... 367 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. 362 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila- ble See Operator's Manual .................. 346 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... 347 Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Man- ual ....................................................... 349
$ Check Brake Fluid Level ............. 336 Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual ................................................ 350
4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refu- eling .................................................... 353
h Check Tires ................................ 355
¥ Check Washer Fluid ................... 365
É Compressor Is Cooling ............... 345
? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off .................................... 351 Cruise Control Inoperative .................. 349
Index 393
Cruise Control Off ............................... 348 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... 327 ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... 329 Distance Pilot Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ........................ 348 Distance Pilot Inoperative ................... 348 Distance Pilot Now Available ............... 347 Â Don't Forget Your Key ................ 360 É Drive More Slowly ...................... 345 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. 360 bExample: Check Left Low Beam .................................................. 366 6Example: Front Left Malfunction Service Required ................................ 340 6Example: Left Side Curtain Air- bag Malfunction Service Required ...... 340
394 Index
Example: Parking Pilot Parking Can- celed .................................................. 347 _Example: Rear Left Backrest Not Latched ....................................... 365 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual ............................... 341 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual ............................... 342 8 Fuel Level Low ............................ 353 8 Gas Cap Loose ........................... 354 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ 328 ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ 330 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ 331 G Inoperative ................................. 341 ÂKey Not Detected (red display message) ............................................. 359
ÂKey Not Detected (white dis- play message) ..................................... 359
É Malfunction See Operator's Manual ................................................ 344
b Malfunction See Operator's Manual ................................................ 366 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away ................................................... 360
 Obtain a New Key ....................... 358
ë Off .............................................. 347 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta- tionary ................................................. 361
F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual ................................................ 333 Parking Pilot and PARKTRONIC Inop- erative See Operator's Manual ............ 349 Parking Pilot Maneuvering Assis- tance Restricted See Operator's Manual ................................................ 349
 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual ............. 359
h Please Correct Tire Pressure ...... 354
F Please Release Parking Brake .... 332 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual ........................ 337 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera- tor's Manual ........................................ 337 Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual ................................................ 338
 Replace Key Battery ................... 358 Reversing Not Possible Service Required .............................................. 361
# See Operator's Manual .............. 352 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer .......................................... 361
6 SRS Malfunction Service Required .............................................. 339
#Start Engine See Operator's Manual ................................................ 354
Index 395
Ð Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required .................. 362
Ð Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Man- ual ....................................................... 363
Ð Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual ... 363 Steering Pilot Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ........................ 348 Steering Pilot Inoperative .................... 348 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cooling .................. 362
# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run- ning ..................................................... 353
#Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual ................................................ 352
É Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low ..... 344
b Switch Off Lights ........................ 367
b Switch On Headlamps ................ 367
Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable .......................................... 356 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ............ 357 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors .................................... 357 Tires Overheated ................................. 357 Tires Overheated Decrease Speed ...... 358 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine .................................. 360 Transmission Malfunction Stop ............ 361 F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake ................................ 332 d Vehicle Operational Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting .................... 361 É Vehicle Rising Please Wait .......... 343 É Vehicle Rising ............................. 343 h Warning Tire Malfunction ........... 356 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ............ 357
Distance control see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ....................... 165 Activating ............................................. 167 Activation conditions ........................... 167 Calling up a speed ............................... 167 Deactivating ......................................... 167 Function .............................................. 165 Lever .................................................... 167 Setting a speed .................................... 167 Storing a speed .................................... 167 System limits ....................................... 165
Distance recorder ................................... 203 DISTRONIC
see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Door
Locking (emergency key) ....................... 59 Opening (from inside) ............................ 56 Unlocking (emergency key) ................... 59 Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 56 Door control panel .................................... 10 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 297
Drinking and driving ................................ 136
Drive Away Assist .................................... 190
396 Index
DRIVE PILOT ............................................. 171 Function ............................................... 171
Drive position Selecting ............................................. 143
Drive program display ............................. 140
Drive programs ........................................ 140 Driver's seat
see Seat Driving light
see Automatic driving lights Driving safety system ............................. 154
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 155 Active Brake Assist .............................. 159 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 155 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion) ..................................................... 159 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist ................................. 159 Overview ............................................. 154 Radar sensors ...................................... 154 Responsibility ...................................... 154 Driving safety system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Driving system see 360° Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC see DRIVE PILOT see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Parking Pilot see Rear view camera see Steering Pilot
Driving tips Drinking and driving ............................ 136 General driving tips ............................. 136 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 136
Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
Drowsiness warning see ATTENTION ASSIST
Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT Configuring drive program I ................. 141 Drive program display .......................... 140 Drive programs .................................... 140 Function .............................................. 140 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) ............................................................. 140
E E-mails
see Messages E10 ............................................................ 319 Easy entry feature
Operation/notes ................................... 90 Setting ................................................... 91 Easy exit feature Operation/notes ................................... 90 Setting ................................................... 91 EASY-PACK load-securing kit .................. 103 Notes ................................................... 103 Tensioning the luggage holder ............. 104 Tensioning the telescopic rod .............. 104
Index 397
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- tion)
Function/notes ................................... 159 ECO display
Function .............................................. 139 Resetting ............................................. 204
ECO start/stop function ................. 138, 139 Automatic engine start ........................ 138 Automatic engine stop ......................... 138 Operation ............................................ 138 Switching off/on ................................. 139
Electric parking brake ............. 151, 152, 153 Applying automatically ......................... 151 Applying or releasing manually ............ 153 Emergency braking .............................. 153 Releasing automatically ....................... 152
Electric parking brake see Parking
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electronics ............................................... 314
Emergency Overview of the help functions .............. 12 Safety vest .......................................... 264
Emergency braking ................................. 153
Emergency call system Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA only) ... 232
Emergency engine start ......................... 280
Emergency key Inserting/removing ............................... 53 Locking a door ....................................... 59 Unlocking a door ................................... 59 Unlocking the tailgate ............................ 64
Emergency operation mode Starting vehicle ................................... 135
Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation .............................................. 27
Energy consumption Key ........................................................ 52
Engine ECO start/stop function ...................... 138 Engine number ..................................... 316 Jump-starting ....................................... 272
Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 135 Starting (smartphone) ......................... 134 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 134 Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 147 Engine hood Opening/closing .................................. 251 Engine number ......................................... 316
Engine oil ................................................. 254 Additives ............................................. 320 Capacity .............................................. 321 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick ............................................... 254 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 321 Topping up ........................................... 254
Entering characters On the controller .................................. 217 On the touchpad .................................. 218
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 156 Activating/deactivating ....................... 159 Crosswind Assist ................................. 159 Function/notes ................................... 156
398 Index
Exterior lighting Care .................................................... 260
Exterior lighting see Lights
Eyeglasses box .......................................... 94
F Fatigue warning
see ATTENTION ASSIST Favorites
Adding ................................................. 216 Calling up ............................................. 215 Deleting ............................................... 216 Moving ................................................. 216 Overview .............................................. 215 Renaming ............................................. 216 Flacon Inserting/removing ............................. 129 Flat tire Changing a wheel ................................ 308 MOExtended tires ................................ 265 Notes ................................................... 264 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 266
Flat tire see Breakdown
Floor mats ................................................ 113
Folding bench seat .................................... 86 Folding back .......................................... 88 Folding out ............................................ 86 Installing and removing the seat cushion .................................................. 87 Notes ..................................................... 86
Fragrance see Fragrance system
Fragrance system .................................... 129 Activating/deactivating ....................... 129 Adjusting the fragrance intensity ......... 129 Inserting/removing the flacon ............. 129
Frequencies Two-way radio ...................................... 315
Frequency band Dial (on-board computer) .................... 206
Front air bag .............................................. 32
Front passenger air bag shutoff .............. 35 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 37
Points to remember when the front passenger seat is occupied ................... 35 Status display ........................................ 37 System self-test ..................................... 37 Front passenger air bag shutoff see Occupant safety Front passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat ............. 81 Front passenger seat see Seat
Fuel ........................................................... 320 Additives ............................................. 320 Consumption ....................................... 320 E10 ...................................................... 319 Gasoline ............................................... 319 Quality (gasoline) ................................. 319 Refueling ............................................. 145 Reserve fuel level ................................ 320 Sulfur content ...................................... 319 Tank capacity ...................................... 320
Fuel consumption On-board computer ............................. 203
Function seat see Door control panel
Index 399
Fuse insert see Fuses
Fuses ........................................................ 280 Assignment diagram ............................ 280 Before changing .................................. 280 Cockpit fuse box ................................. 282 Fuse box in the cargo compartment .... 283 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 281 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well ...................................................... 282 Notes .................................................. 280
G Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ........................... 151 Opening or closing the garage door ..... 150 Programming buttons .......................... 148 Radio equipment approval number ...... 151 Resolving problems ............................. 150 Synchronizing the rolling code ............. 149 Garmin® MAP PILOT navigation mod- ule Activating ............................................ 223 Overview ............................................. 223
Gasoline .................................................... 319 Gearshift paddles
see Steering wheel gearshift paddles Gearshift recommendation .................... 143 Genuine parts ............................................ 15 Genuine wood (Care) .............................. 262 Glide mode ............................................... 144 Glove box
Air vent ................................................ 131 Glove compartment
Locking/unlocking ................................ 94
H Handbrake
see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 284 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 63 HANDS-FREE ACCESS
see Opening the tailgate using your foot Hazard warning lights ............................. 116
Head restraint ........................................... 82 Front (adjusting manually) ..................... 82 Front (luxury head restraint) .................. 83 Rear (lowering from the front) ............... 84 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting) ............................................. 84 Rear passenger compartment (removing/installing) ............................. 84
Head-up display Activating/deactivating ....................... 209 Adjusting brightness (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 208 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ 208 Adjusting the position (on-board computer) ............................................ 208 Function .............................................. 208 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 208 Using the memory function ................... 91
Head-up Display see Menu (on-board computer)
Head-up Display menu see On-board computer
400 Index
Heating see Climate control
High beam Activating/deactivating ....................... 115
High-beam flasher ................................... 115 High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 116 High-pressure cleaning equipment (care) ........................................................ 258 Hill start assist ........................................ 173 HOLD function ......................................... 173
Activating/deactivating ....................... 173 Function/notes .................................... 173 Hood Function (active hood) ......................... 251 Resetting (active hood) ........................ 251
I Identification plate
Engine .................................................. 316 Refrigerant .......................................... 323 Vehicle ................................................. 316
Ignition Switching on (start/stop button) ......... 133
Ignition key ................................................ 51
Immobilizer ................................................ 75 Inattentiveness assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST Indicator lamp
see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program
Configuring .......................................... 141 Selecting ............................................. 140 Information Satellite radio ...................................... 245 Instrument cluster .................................. 368 Instrument cluster see Instrument Display Instrument Display .................................. 199 Adjusting the lighting .......................... 202 Function/notes ................................... 199 Warning and indicator lamps (overview) .. 6 Warning/indicator lamps .................... 368
Instrument Display see Display (on-board computer) see Instrument cluster
Instrument lighting ................................. 202
Instrument lighting see Dashboard lighting
Intelligent Light System Cornering light function ....................... 116
Interior lighting ........................................ 118 Ambient lighting ................................... 119 Setting ................................................. 118 Switch-off delay time ........................... 119
Interior lighting see Interior lighting see Lighting see Lights
Internet Deleting favorites ................................ 236 Deleting history ................................... 236 Setting favorites .................................. 236
Internet connection Canceling permission .......................... 234 Ending ................................................. 235
Index 401
Establishing ......................................... 235 Mobile phone details ........................... 235 Setting access data ............................. 234 Setting up ............................................ 234 Ionization ................................................. 129
J Jack
Storage location .................................. 307 Jump-start connection ............................ 272 Jump-starting ........................................... 272 Jump-starting
see Jump-start connection
K Key
Battery .................................................. 53 Energy consumption .............................. 52 KEYLESS-GO Locking the vehicle ................................ 56 Problem ................................................. 57 Unlocking setting .................................. 52 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 56
Kickdown ................................................. 144 Using ................................................... 144
Knee air bag ............................................... 32
L Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling Laden ........................................................ 102
Bag hook ............................................. 102 Definitions ........................................... 301 Roof rack ............................................. 106 Stowage space underneath the cargo compartment floor .............................. 105 Tie-down eyes ...................................... 102 Laden see EASY-PACK load-securing kit Lamp see Interior lighting Lamp (Instrument Display) see Warning/indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language Notes ................................................... 221 Setting ................................................. 221
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat attachment
Installing ................................................ 45 Notes ..................................................... 44 Level control system see AIR BODY CONTROL Light switch Overview .............................................. 114
Lighting ..................................................... 118
Lighting see Lights
Lights ................................................ 114, 118 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 116 Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 202 Automatic driving lights ....................... 115 Combination switch ............................. 115 Cornering light function ....................... 116 Hazard warning lights ........................... 116 High beam ........................................... 115 High-beam flasher ................................ 115 Light switch ......................................... 114
402 Index
Low beam ............................................ 114 Parking lights ....................................... 114 Rear fog light ........................................ 115 Responsibility for lighting systems ....... 114 Standing lights ..................................... 114 Turn signal light .................................... 115 Limited Warranty Vehicle .................................................. 22 Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ...... 64
Load index (tires) .................................... 299
Load rating (tires) ................................... 299
Loading guidelines .................................... 92
Loading information table ...................... 291 Loads
Securing ................................................ 92 Locator lighting
Activating/deactivating ....................... 118 Locking ....................................................... 51
Locking/unlocking .............................. 56, 59 Low beam
Switching on/off .................................. 114
Lowering Vehicle ................................................. 312
Lubricant additives see Additives
Luggage Securing ................................................ 92
Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 82
M Maintenance
Vehicle ................................................... 17 Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Making a call via the overhead con- trol panel
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA only) ... 231 Malfunction
Restraint system .................................... 27 Malfunction message
see Display message
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 259
Maximum load rating .............................. 298
Maximum permissible load Calculation example ............................ 293 Determining ........................................ 292
Maximum tire pressures ........................ 298
Media Menu (on-board computer) .................. 206 Searching ............................................ 240
Media Interface Activating ............................................ 240 Information .......................................... 240 Overview ............................................. 240
Media mode Activating ............................................ 238
Media playback Operating (on-board computer) ........... 206
Media search Starting ............................................... 240
Media source Dial (on-board computer) .................... 206
Index 403
Memory function Head-up Display -- Calling up saved settings .................................................. 91 Head-up Display -- Saving settings ........ 91 Operating ............................................... 91 Outside mirror -- Calling up saved settings .................................................. 91 Outside mirror -- Saving settings ........... 91 Seat -- Calling up saved settings ............ 91 Seat -- Saving settings ........................... 91 Steering wheel -- Calling up saved settings .................................................. 91 Steering wheel -- Saving settings ........... 91
Menu (on-board computer) .................... 208 Assistance graphic .............................. 203 Media .................................................. 206 Navigation ........................................... 205 Overview ............................................. 200 Radio ................................................... 206 Service ................................................ 202 Telephone ............................................ 207 Trip ...................................................... 203
Mercedes-Benz Apps Calling up ............................................ 235
Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA only) Emergency call system ........................ 232 Making a call via the overhead con- trol panel ............................................. 231 MB Info call ......................................... 233 Roadside Assistance call ..................... 233 Transferred data .................................. 233
Mercedes-Benz service center see Qualified specialist workshop
Message (multifunction display) see Display message
Message memory .................................... 326
Messages ................................................. 230 Making a call ....................................... 231 Notes .................................................. 230 Reading ............................................... 231 Settings ............................................... 230
Mirrors see Outside mirror see Outside mirrors
Mobile phone ........................................... 207 Canceling permission for Internet connection .......................................... 234 Wireless charging ................................. 112
Mobile phone see Telephone
Model type ............................................... 316
MOExtended tires ................................... 265 Multifunction display (on-board com- puter) ........................................................ 201 Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons ............................ 200 Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel Multimedia system .......................... 210, 218
Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 154 Calling up menus ................................. 214 Central controls ................................... 210 Configuring display settings ................. 218 Main functions ..................................... 214 Overview .............................................. 210 Restoring the factory settings ............. 222 Switching the sound on/off ................. 217
404 Index
N Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 205 Navigation messages
On-board computer ............................. 205 Neutral
Selecting ............................................. 142 Noise
Wheels and tires .................................. 284 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....... 136
O Occupant safety .......... 26, 28, 32, 35, 39, 40
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 50 Occupant safety
see Child seat Odometer
see Total distance Oil
see Engine oil On-board computer ................................. 208
Assistance graphic menu .................... 203
Displaying the service due date ........... 250 Media menu ........................................ 206 Menus ................................................. 200 Multifunction display ........................... 201 Navigation system menu ..................... 205 Operating ............................................ 200 Radio menu ......................................... 206 Service menu ...................................... 202 Telephone menu .................................. 207 Trip menu ............................................ 203 On-board computer see Computer see Operating system On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-board electronics Notes ................................................... 314 Two-way radios .................................... 314 On-board electronics see Electronics
Opening the tailgate using your foot ....... 63
Operating fluids Additives (fuel) .................................... 320 Brake fluid ........................................... 321
Coolant (engine) .................................. 322 Engine oil ............................................ 320 Fuel (gasoline) ...................................... 319 Notes ................................................... 318 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 323 Windshield washer fluid ...................... 322 Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 19 Information ............................................ 18 Operating system .................................... 200 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 16 Operator's Manual (digital) ....................... 14
Outside mirror ......................................... 124 Parking position ................................... 124
Outside mirrors ............................... 123, 124 Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................ 124 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 125 Folding in/out ..................................... 123 Setting ................................................. 123 Using the memory function ................... 91
Overhead control panel .............................. 8
Index 405
Overview Garmin® MAP PILOT navigation mod- ule ....................................................... 223 Phone book ......................................... 227 Satellite radio ...................................... 246
P Paint code ................................................. 316 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ......... 259 Panic alarm ................................................ 52
Activating/deactivating ......................... 52 Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof Park position
Selecting ............................................. 142 Selecting automatically ....................... 142 Parking .............................................. 151, 153 Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................... 178 Activating ............................................ 180 Adjusting warning tones ...................... 180 Deactivating ........................................ 180
Function ............................................... 178 Side impact protection ........................ 179 System limitations ............................... 178 Parking assistance systems see Parking Pilot Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking lights ........................................... 114
Parking Pilot ............................................ 186 Cross Traffic Alert ................................ 191 Drive Away Assist ................................ 190 Exiting a parking space ........................ 189 Function .............................................. 186 Maneuvering assistance ...................... 191 Parking ................................................ 188 System limits ....................................... 186
Parking position Outside mirror ..................................... 124 Passenger outside mirror -- storing using the memory button .................... 125
Payload Calculation example ............................ 293 Determining the maximum .................. 292
Pedestrian protection see Active hood (pedestrian protection)
Perfume see Fragrance system
Perfume vial see Fragrance system
Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 154
Permitted towing methods ..................... 275
Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 50 Phone book
Deleting a contact ............................... 229 Display and sorting criteria ................. 228 Downloading mobile phone contacts .. 228 Importing contacts .............................. 228 Overview ............................................. 227 Saving a contact .................................. 228 Searching for a contact ....................... 228 PIN protection for data export ............... 222
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 262 Playback options
Selecting ............................................. 239
406 Index
Power supply Switching on (start/stop button) ......... 133
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)
Function ................................................ 39 PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 39 Reversing measures .............................. 40 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see Anticipatory occupant protection see Occupant safety see Preventative occupant protection system PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Activation .............................................. 27 Function ................................................ 40 PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see Anticipatory occupant protection see Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection plus) Function ................................................ 40 Reversing measures .............................. 40
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection plus)
see Anticipatory occupant protection see Occupant safety Presets menu view Activating/deactivating ....................... 244 Preventative occupant protection sys- tem ............................................................. 39 Protection against theft ............................ 75 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ................ 75 Protection of the environment Notes ..................................................... 15
Q QR code
Rescue card .......................................... 22 Qualified specialist workshop .................. 21
R Radar sensors .......................................... 154 Radiator shutters
see AIRPANEL (Care)
Radio Activating ............................................ 243 Activating/deactivating the presets view ..................................................... 244 Calling up the station list ..................... 244 Delete station ...................................... 244 Displaying information ......................... 245 Displaying the artist and track ............. 245 Editing station presets ......................... 244 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 206 Moving stations ................................... 244 Overview ............................................. 243 Searching for stations ......................... 243 Setting a station .................................. 243 Setting the frequency band ................. 243 Storing stations ................................... 244 Switching HD radio on/off .................. 243 Tagging music tracks ........................... 245 To display radio text ............................. 245
Radio station list Calling up ............................................ 244
Radio stations Dial (on-board computer) .................... 206
Rain closing function Sliding sunroof ...................................... 72
Index 407
Range Displaying ............................................ 203
Reading lamp see Interior lighting
Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 48
Rear fog light ............................................ 115 Rear seat
see Seat Rear view camera .................................... 181
Care .................................................... 260 Function ............................................... 181 Rear window Replacing the wiper blade ................... 122 Rear window heater ................................ 127 Rear window wiper Activating/deactivating ....................... 120 Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Notes .................................................. 323 Refueling Refueling the vehicle ........................... 145
Reporting malfunctions relevant to safety .......................................................... 21
Rescue card ............................................... 22 Reserve
Fuel ..................................................... 320 Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 222 Restoring (factory settings)
see Reset function (multimedia system) Restraint system
Children ................................................. 41 Function in an accident ......................... 27 Functionality .......................................... 27 Malfunction ........................................... 27 Protection .............................................. 26 Reduced protection ............................... 26 System self-test ..................................... 27 Warning lamp ........................................ 27 Restraint system see Occupant safety Reverse gear Selecting ............................................. 142 Reversing camera Opening the camera cover .................. 184
Reversing camera (Parking Pilot) Opening the camera cover .................. 186
RF transmitters see Two-way radios
Rims (Care) .............................................. 260 Roadside Assistance ................................. 17 Roll away protection
see HOLD function Roller sunblind
Side windows ........................................ 65 Roller sunblind
see Cover Roof lining (care) ..................................... 262 Roof load .................................................. 325 Roof rack .................................................. 106 Run-flat characteristics
MOExtended tires ................................ 265
S Safety
see Child seat
408 Index
Safety net Attaching ............................................. 101
Safety systems see Driving safety system
Safety vest ............................................... 264
Satellite radio Activating ............................................ 246 Displaying channel information ........... 248 Displaying service information ............ 248 Information .......................................... 245 Music and sport alerts function ........... 247 Overview ............................................. 246 Registering .......................................... 246 Restrictions ......................................... 246 Saving a channel .................................. 247 Selecting a category ............................ 246 Selecting a channel ............................. 247 Setting the music and sport alerts ....... 247
SD memory card Inserting/removing ............................. 238
Seat ...................................................... 78, 95 4-way lumbar support ........................... 82 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 81 Adjusting (manually and electrically) ..... 78
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 80 Adjusting the seat backrest angle (rear passenger compartment) .............. 98 Backrest (rear) folding forward .............. 95 Correct driver's seat position ................ 77 Folding back the backrest (rear passenger compartment) ...................... 97 Locking the backrest (rear passenger compartment) ........................................ 97 Setting options ...................................... 10 Using the memory function ................... 91 Seat see Folding bench seat see Head restraint Seat belt Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 32 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 31 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 32 Function ................................................ 31 Seat belt warning see Seat belts
Seat belts ................................................... 32 Adjusting the height ............................... 31 Care .................................................... 262 Fastening ............................................... 31 Protection .............................................. 28 Reduced protection ............................... 29 Releasing ............................................... 32 Warning lamp ........................................ 32
Seat belts see Belt see Occupant safety
Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 262
Seat heater Switching on/off ................................... 84
Seat ventilation Switching on/off ................................... 85
Selecting a gear see Shifting gears
Selector lever ........................................... 141 Selector lever
see DIRECT SELECT lever
Sensors (Care) ......................................... 260
Index 409
Service Menu (on-board computer) .................. 202
Service center see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS
Setting a speed see Cruise control
Setting Daylight Saving Time (Sum- mer) .......................................................... 219
Setting the date format ........................... 219 Setting the distance unit and temper- ature unit ................................................. 221 Settings
Messages ............................................ 230 Shifting gears .......................................... 143
Gearshift recommendation .................. 143 Manually .............................................. 143 Short text messages see Messages Side air bag ................................................ 32
Side impact protection ........................... 179
Side windows Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment ....................... 49 Closing .................................................. 66 Closing with the SmartKey .................... 68 Convenience closing .............................. 67 Convenience opening ............................ 67 Opening ................................................. 66 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 67 Problem ................................................. 68 Roller sunblind ...................................... 65
Side windows see Window lifter see Windows
Size designation (tires) ........................... 299
Skid chains .............................................. 285
Sliding sunroof .......................................... 70 Automatic functions .............................. 72 Closing .................................................. 70 Closing with the SmartKey .................... 68 Opening ................................................. 70 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 67 Problem ................................................. 73 Rain closing function ............................. 72
SmartKey .................................................... 51 Emergency key ...................................... 53 Key ring attachment .............................. 53 Overview ................................................ 51 Panic alarm ........................................... 52 Problem ................................................. 54 Unlocking setting .................................. 52
SmartKey see Ignition key see Locking see Vehicle key
Smartphone Starting vehicle ................................... 134
Smartphone see Telephone
Snow chains ............................................ 285
Snow chains see Skid chains
Socket (12 V) ............................................ 109 Cargo compartment ............................. 110 Front center console ........................... 109 Rear passenger compartment ............. 109
410 Index
Socket (115 V) Rear passenger compartment ............. 109
Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound ................................. 39
Sound see Burmester® surround sound system see Sound settings
Sound settings ......................................... 248 Adjusting treble, mid and bass ............ 248 Information .......................................... 248
Speed dial list Calling up ............................................ 230 Deleting speed dial presets ................. 230 Setting up ............................................ 230
Speed limit for winter tires Setting ................................................. 165
Speed rating (tires) ................................. 299
Speedometer Digital .................................................. 203
Standby mode Activating/deactivating ....................... 154 Function .............................................. 153
Standing lights ......................................... 114
Start/Stop button Starting vehicle ................................... 134 Switching off the vehicle ...................... 147 Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................ 133
Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function
Starting the engine see Vehicle
Starting-off aid see Hill start assist
Station Deleting ............................................... 244 Moving ................................................. 244 Searching ............................................ 243 Setting ................................................. 243 Storing ................................................. 244
Station presets Editing ................................................. 244
Steering Pilot ........................................... 171 Activating/deactivating ....................... 173 Active Emergency Stop Assist .............. 172 Active Lane Change Assist ................... 172 Function ............................................... 171
System limits ....................................... 171 Steering wheel ........................................ 200
Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 90 Adjusting (manually) .............................. 89 Buttons ................................................ 200 Steering wheel heater ........................... 90 Using the memory function ................... 91 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 143 Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating ......................... 90 Stowage areas see Laden see Stowage compartment Stowage compartment ............................. 94 Armrest ................................................. 94 Center console ...................................... 94 Door ...................................................... 94 Eyeglasses box ...................................... 94 Glove box ............................................... 94 Rear armrest .......................................... 94 Stowage compartments see Laden see Stowage compartment
Index 411
Stowage space underneath the cargo compartment floor .................................. 105
Sulfur content .......................................... 319
Sun visor Operating ............................................ 125
Surround View see 360° Camera
Suspension Setting the suspension level ................ 176
Suspension see AIR BODY CONTROL
Suspension level Setting ................................................. 176
Switch-off delay time Exterior ................................................ 118 Interior ................................................. 119
Switching the surround sound on/off Burmester® surround sound system .... 249
Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (control panel) .................................................. 128
System settings Automatic volume adjustment ............. 220 Language ............................................. 221 Notes on language selection ................ 221 Reset function (multimedia system) .... 222 Setting the distance unit and tem- perature unit ........................................ 221
System settings see Multimedia system
T Tailgate ....................................................... 59
Closing ................................................... 61 Emergency release from the inside ....... 65 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 63 Limiting the opening angle .................... 64 Opening ................................................. 59 Opening dimensions ............................ 324 Unlocking (emergency key) ................... 64 Tailgate see Locking/unlocking Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 260 Tank capacity Fuel ..................................................... 320
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 320 Technical data
Information .......................................... 314 Tire pressure monitoring system ......... 291 Vehicle identification plate ................... 316 Telephone ................................................. 224 Activating functions during a call ........ 226 Calls with several participants ............. 227 Disconnecting the mobile phone ......... 225 Incoming call during an existing call .... 227 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 207 Notes ................................................... 224 Reception and transmission volume .... 226 Switching mobile phones .................... 225 Telephone menu overview ................... 224 Telephone operation ............................ 226 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 112 Telephone see Mobile phone Telephone number Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 207 Temperature ............................................. 127
Temperature grade .................................. 296
412 Index
Text messages see Messages
Through-loading feature see Seat
Tie-down eyes .......................................... 102 Time
Manual time setting ............................. 220 Setting Daylight Saving Time (Sum- mer) ..................................................... 219 Setting the time and date automati- cally ..................................................... 219 Setting the time zone ........................... 219 Setting the time/date format ............... 219 TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............ 297
Tire and Loading Information placard ... 291
Tire characteristics ................................. 299 Tire inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit Tire information table ............................. 291
Tire labeling ............................................. 296 Characteristics .................................... 299 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 297
Load index ........................................... 299 Load rating .......................................... 299 Maximum tire load .............................. 298 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 298 Overview ............................................. 296 Speed rating ........................................ 299 Temperature grade .............................. 296 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 296 Tire size designation ............................ 299 Traction grade ..................................... 296 Tread wear grade ................................. 296 Tire load (maximum) ............................... 298
Tire pressure ........................................... 266 Checking (manually) ............................ 288 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ............................................... 290 Maximum ............................................ 298 Notes .................................................. 285 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system ........................................... 291 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 289 Tire pressure table .............................. 287
Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure .................. 290
Function .............................................. 289 Restarting ............................................ 291 Technical data ..................................... 291 Tire pressure table .................................. 287
Tire Quality Grading ................................ 296
Tire tread ................................................. 284 Tire-change tool kit
Overview ............................................. 307 TIREFIT kit ................................................ 266
Storage location .................................. 266 Using ................................................... 266 TIREFIT kit see Tire pressure Tires Changing ............................................. 308 Changing hub caps .............................. 308 Characteristics .................................... 299 Checking ............................................. 284 Checking the tire pressure (man- ually) ................................................... 288 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system) ...................... 290 Definitions ........................................... 301
Index 413
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 297 Flat tire ................................................ 264 Load index ........................................... 299 Load rating .......................................... 299 Maximum tire load .............................. 298 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 298 MOExtended tires ................................ 265 Mounting .............................................. 311 Noise ................................................... 284 Notes on Installing .............................. 304 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 296 Removing ............................................. 311 Replacing ............................................ 304 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system ........................................... 291 Selection ............................................. 304 Snow chains ........................................ 285 Speed rating ........................................ 299 Storing ................................................. 307 Temperature grade .............................. 296 Tire and Loading Information placard .. 291 Tire pressure (Notes) ........................... 285 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 289 Tire pressure table .............................. 287
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 296 Tire size designation ............................ 299 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 266 Traction grade ..................................... 296 Tread wear grade ................................. 296 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 284 To raise Vehicle ................................................ 309 Tone settings Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 249 Calling up the sound menu .................. 248 Tool see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether .................................................. 46
Total distance .......................................... 203 Displaying ............................................ 203
Touch Control On-board computer ............................. 200 Operating ............................................. 211 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 212
Touchpad Activating/deactivating ....................... 212 Operating ............................................. 213
Reading the handwriting recognition aloud .................................................... 214 Selecting a station and track ............... 214 Selecting an input language ................. 214 Tow starting ............................................. 280 Towing a trailer Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 194 Active Lane Keeping Assist .................. 195 Towing away ............................................. 276 Towing eye Installing .............................................. 280 Storage location .................................. 279 Towing methods ...................................... 275 Track Selecting (audio mode) ....................... 239 Traction grade ......................................... 296
Transmission position display ................ 141 Transporting
Vehicle ................................................. 278 Tread wear grade ..................................... 296
Trim element (Care) ................................ 262
414 Index
Trip Menu (on-board computer) .................. 203
Trip computer Displaying ............................................ 203 Resetting ............................................. 204
Trip distance Displaying ............................................ 203 Resetting ............................................. 204
Trip distance see Distance recorder see Trip meter
Trip meter ................................................ 203 Trunk lid
see Tailgate Trunk load ................................................ 325 Turn signal indicator
see Turn signal light Turn signal light ....................................... 115
Activating/deactivating ....................... 115 Two-way radios ........................................ 314
Frequencies ......................................... 315 Notes on installation ............................ 314 Transmission output (maximum) .......... 315
U Unlocking setting ...................................... 52 USB devices
Connecting .......................................... 239 Using the telephone
see Calls
V Vehicle .............................................. 134, 135
Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 154 Correct use ............................................ 21 Data acquisition .................................... 22 Diagnostics connection ......................... 20 Equipment ............................................. 16 Limited Warranty ................................... 22 Locking (automatically) ......................... 58 Locking (from inside) ............................. 56 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 56 Locking (mechanical key) ...................... 58 Lowering .............................................. 312 Maintenance .......................................... 17 Parking ................................................ 153 Problem notification .............................. 21
QR code rescue card ............................. 22 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 21 Raising ................................................ 309 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 135 Starting (smartphone) ......................... 134 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 134 Switching off (start/stop button) ......... 147 Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 56 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 56 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 67 Vehicle see Locking/unlocking Vehicle battery ........................................ 270 Vehicle data Roof load ............................................. 325 Trunk load ........................................... 325 Turning radius ...................................... 324 Vehicle height ...................................... 324 Vehicle length ...................................... 324 Vehicle width ....................................... 324 Wheelbase ........................................... 324 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 324
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate Paint code ............................................ 316 VIN ....................................................... 316
Vehicle identification plate see Model type
Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (smartphone) ......... 134
Vehicle key ................................................. 51
Vehicle key see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada ................... 17
Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 266 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 266 Towing eye ........................................... 279
Ventilating Convenience opening ............................ 67
Ventilation see Climate control
Vents see Air vents
VIN ............................................................ 316 Identification plate ............................... 316 Seat ..................................................... 316 Windshield ........................................... 316
Visibility Defrosting the windows ....................... 129 Windshield heater ................................ 130
W Warning lamp
see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system
see Protection against theft Warning/indicator lamp
!ABS warning lamp ....................... 372 $Brake warning lamp (USA) ........... 370 JBrakes warning lamp (Canada) .... 370 ?Coolant warning lamp ................. 382 ·Distance warning lamp ................ 378
Index 415
#Electrical malfunction warning lamp .................................................... 380 ;Engine diagnosis warning lamp ... 380 åESP® OFF warning lamp .............. 374 ÷ESP® warning lamp flashes ......... 372 ÷ESP® warning lamp lights up ....... 373 8Fuel reserve warning lamp .. 380, 381 ÐPower steering system warning lamp .................................................... 379 éRBS warning lamp (USA/CND) ... 369 !Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (Canada only) ... 375 FRed indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (USA only) ......... 375 6Restraint system warning lamp .... 376 7Seat belt warning lamp flashes ... 377 7Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ 377 hTire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes ................... 385
416 Index
hTire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up ................. 384 !Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is malfunctioning .......... 375
Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 368 Instrument Display (overview) ................. 6 Overview ............................................. 368 PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ 37
Warranty .................................................... 22 Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... 258 Web browser
Calling up a website ............................ 235 Calling up options ............................... 236 Calling up settings ............................... 236 Closing ................................................ 237 Deleting Internet favorites ................... 236 Deleting Internet history ...................... 236 Overview ............................................. 235 Setting Internet favorites ..................... 236 Website Calling up ............................................ 235
Wheel chock ............................................ 307 Wheel rotation ......................................... 306 Wheels
Care .................................................... 260 Changing ............................................. 308 Changing hub caps .............................. 308 Checking ............................................. 284 Checking the tire pressure (man- ually) ................................................... 288 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres- sure monitoring system) ...................... 290 Definitions ........................................... 301 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 297 Flat tire ................................................ 264 Load index ........................................... 299 Load rating .......................................... 299 Maximum tire load .............................. 298 Maximum tire pressure ....................... 298 MOExtended tires ................................ 265 Mounting .............................................. 311 Noise ................................................... 284 Notes on installing .............................. 304 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 296 Removing ............................................. 311
Replacing ............................................ 304 Restarting the tire pressure monitor- ing system ........................................... 291 Rotating ............................................... 306 Selection ............................................. 304 Snow chains ........................................ 285 Speed rating ........................................ 299 Storing ................................................. 307 Temperature grade .............................. 296 Tire and Loading Information placard .. 291 Tire characteristics .............................. 299 Tire pressure (Notes) ........................... 285 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 289 Tire pressure table .............................. 287 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 296 Tire size designation ............................ 299 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 266 Traction grade ..................................... 296 Tread wear grade ................................. 296 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 284 Window air bag .......................................... 32 Window lifter ............................................. 66 Windows .................................................... 66 Closing .................................................. 66
Opening ................................................. 66
Windows (Care) ....................................... 260
Windshield Defrosting ............................................ 127 Infrared reflective ................................ 126 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 120
Windshield heater ................................... 130
Windshield heating see Windshield heater
Windshield washer fluid ......................... 322 Notes .................................................. 322
Windshield washer system Refilling ............................................... 256
Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating ........................ 119 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 120
Winter operation Snow chains ........................................ 285
Winter tires Setting the permanent speed limit ...... 165
Wiper blades Care .................................................... 260 Changing ............................................. 120
Wireless charging Function/notes .................................... 111 Mobile phone ....................................... 112
Wireless vehicle components Declaration of Conformity ..................... 19
Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Index 417
OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)